BTS3900AL

BTS3900AL (Ver.
A)
Hardware Description
Issue Date 2012-08-05 04
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document provides reference for planning and deploying a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) (BTS3900AL for short) site. It describes the configuration, functions, and specifications of components in a BTS3900AL cabinet as well as cable types, cable connections, and connector specifications.
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name BTS3900AL BTS3900AL WCDMA BTS3900AL GSM BTS3900AL LTE Product Version V100R007C00 V200R014C00 V100R014C00 V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for: l l l System engineers Base station installation personnel Site maintenance personnel
Organization
1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
About This Document
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet This chapter describes the exteriors, boards, modules, and configurations of BTS3900AL cabinets, providing reference for planning and deploying BTS3900AL sites. 3 BTS3900AL Modules A BTS3900AL cabinet consists of the following modules: RFU, RRU, BBU3900, SLPU, and EMUA. 4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900AL Cabinet This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, base station power distribution scheme, and components in the power system of the BTS3900AL cabinet. 5 BTS3900AL Monitoring Scheme and Boards The BTS3900AL monitoring system monitors all boards and components in a BTS3900AL cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The CCU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to monitor the surrounding environment of the BTS3900AL. 6 BTS3900AL Components This section describes the components of a BTS3900AL cabinet. 7 BTS3900AL Cables The BTS3900AL cables are the PGND cables, equipotential cables, power cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
iii
About This Document
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
iv
About This Document
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description.................................................1 2 BTS3900AL Cabinet......................................................................................................................5
2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet..................................................................................................................6 2.2 Interior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet...................................................................................................................6 2.3 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900AL Cabinet.............................................................................................12 2.3.1 Application Scenario of a BTS3900AL Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs................12 2.3.2 Application Scenario of a BTS3900AL Cabinet Configured with Both RFUs and RRUs.....................18 2.4 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications.........................................................................................................25 2.5 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment........................................................................................26
3 BTS3900AL Modules...................................................................................................................28
3.1 RFU..................................................................................................................................................................29 3.1.1 DRFU.......................................................................................................................................................29 3.1.2 GRFU.......................................................................................................................................................32 3.1.3 WRFU......................................................................................................................................................36 3.1.4 WRFUd....................................................................................................................................................40 3.1.5 WRFUe....................................................................................................................................................43 3.1.6 LRFU.......................................................................................................................................................47 3.1.7 LRFUe.....................................................................................................................................................50 3.1.8 CRFUd.....................................................................................................................................................54 3.1.9 MRFU......................................................................................................................................................57 3.1.10 MRFUd..................................................................................................................................................61 3.1.11 MRFUe..................................................................................................................................................65 3.2 RRU..................................................................................................................................................................68 3.3 BBU3900 Components.....................................................................................................................................69 3.3.1 BBU3900.................................................................................................................................................69 3.3.2 BBU3900 Functions................................................................................................................................70 3.3.3 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.....................................................................................................................71 3.3.4 WMPT.....................................................................................................................................................97 3.3.5 UMPT....................................................................................................................................................103 3.3.6 GTMU...................................................................................................................................................111 3.3.7 LMPT.....................................................................................................................................................118 Issue 2012-08-05 (04) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi
Contents
3.3.8 WBBP....................................................................................................................................................122 3.3.9 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................128 3.3.10 FAN.....................................................................................................................................................134 3.3.11 UPEU...................................................................................................................................................136 3.3.12 UEIU....................................................................................................................................................140 3.3.13 UTRP...................................................................................................................................................141 3.3.14 USCU...................................................................................................................................................149 3.3.15 UBRI....................................................................................................................................................153 3.3.16 UCIU...................................................................................................................................................155 3.4 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals......................................................................................157 3.4.1 Configuration Rules for Surge Protection Boards for Transmission Signals........................................158 3.4.2 UELP.....................................................................................................................................................159 3.4.3 UFLP.....................................................................................................................................................161 3.5 SLPU..............................................................................................................................................................162 3.5.1 SLPU.....................................................................................................................................................162 3.5.2 Configuration Rules for SLPU Boards..................................................................................................162 3.5.3 USLP2...................................................................................................................................................163 3.6 GPS Surge Protector.......................................................................................................................................165 3.7 DDF................................................................................................................................................................166 3.8 EMUA............................................................................................................................................................167
4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900AL Cabinet...............168

4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables.............................................................170 4.2 Power Distribution for BTS3900AL Cabinets...............................................................................................171 4.3 PDU05A.........................................................................................................................................................176 4.4 PDU03D.........................................................................................................................................................178 4.5 ETP.................................................................................................................................................................179 4.5.1 ETP Subrack..........................................................................................................................................179 4.5.2 PMU.......................................................................................................................................................180 4.5.3 PSU........................................................................................................................................................183 4.6 Junction Box...................................................................................................................................................185 4.7 DCDU-11C.....................................................................................................................................................186 4.8 DCDU-11B.....................................................................................................................................................188 4.9 DCDU-03B.....................................................................................................................................................191 4.10 DCDU-11A...................................................................................................................................................193
5 BTS3900AL Monitoring Scheme and Boards.......................................................................196

5.1 Principles for Monitoring a BTS3900AL Cabinet.........................................................................................197 5.2 Principles of Customized Alarm Input...........................................................................................................199 5.3 Monitoring Boards..........................................................................................................................................202 5.3.1 CCU.......................................................................................................................................................202 5.3.2 CMUF....................................................................................................................................................204 5.3.3 PMU.......................................................................................................................................................207
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
vii
Contents
6 BTS3900AL Components.........................................................................................................211
6.1 FAU................................................................................................................................................................212 6.2 ELU................................................................................................................................................................214 6.3 HAU................................................................................................................................................................214 6.4 Sensors............................................................................................................................................................217 6.4.1 Door Status Sensor................................................................................................................................217 6.4.2 Temperature Sensor...............................................................................................................................218 6.5 Storage Battery...............................................................................................................................................218 6.6 Cabinet Lamp.................................................................................................................................................219
7 BTS3900AL Cables....................................................................................................................221
7.1 List of BTS3900AL Cables............................................................................................................................223 7.2 Cable Outlets in a BTS3900AL Cabinet........................................................................................................232 7.3 BTS3900AL Cable Distribution.....................................................................................................................233 7.3.1 Power Cable Connections......................................................................................................................233 7.3.2 Transmission Cable Connections..........................................................................................................236 7.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections.......................................................................................................................247 7.3.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections..................................................................................................258 7.3.5 RF Cable Connections...........................................................................................................................261 7.3.6 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................285 7.4 PGND Cables.................................................................................................................................................286 7.5 Equipotential Cable........................................................................................................................................287 7.6 BTS3900AL Power Cables............................................................................................................................288 7.6.1 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet............................................................................288 7.6.2 AC Input Power Cable for the ETP.......................................................................................................289 7.6.3 Input Power Cable for the DCDU-11C.................................................................................................290 7.6.4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H.....................................................................................................291 7.6.5 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL DC Cabinet............................................................................291 7.6.6 FAU Power Cable..................................................................................................................................293 7.6.7 RFU Power Cable..................................................................................................................................293 7.6.8 CCU Power Cable.................................................................................................................................294 7.6.9 BBU Power Cable.................................................................................................................................295 7.6.10 Power Cable for the EMUA................................................................................................................296 7.6.11 Input Power Cable for the Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet...........................................297 7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries..................................................................................................................298 7.6.13 CMUF Power Cable............................................................................................................................300 7.6.14 Transfer Cable for the Fan on the Front Door.....................................................................................300 7.6.15 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box.................................................................................................300 7.6.16 HAU Power Cable...............................................................................................................................302 7.7 BTS3900AL Transmission Cables.................................................................................................................303 7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable...........................................................................................................................................303 7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable.................................................................................................306 7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable......................................................................................................................307 Issue 2012-08-05 (04) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
Contents
7.7.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports........................................................................308 7.7.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports.................................................................................308 7.7.6 FE/GE Ethernet Cable...........................................................................................................................309 7.7.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable......................................................................................................310 7.8 CPRI Electrical Cable.....................................................................................................................................311 7.9 Signal Cables for the BTS3900AL.................................................................................................................311 7.9.1 Inter-BBU Signal Cable.........................................................................................................................311 7.9.2 BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................313 7.9.3 Inter-CCU Signal Cable.........................................................................................................................314 7.9.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU..................................................................................................315 7.9.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H...........................................................................................316 7.9.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the CMUF................................................................................................317 7.9.7 Inter-HAU Signal Cable........................................................................................................................318 7.9.8 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HAU..................................................................................................319 7.9.9 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor............................................................................319 7.9.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FAU.................................................................................................320 7.9.11 ELU Signal Cable................................................................................................................................321 7.9.12 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU.................................................................322 7.9.13 Monitoring Signal Cables for the AC Surge Protection Module.........................................................322 7.9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA.............................................................................................323 7.9.15 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable................................................................................................324 7.9.16 GPS Clock Signal Cable......................................................................................................................325 7.9.17 GPS Jumper.........................................................................................................................................325 7.9.18 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance..................................................................................................325 7.10 BTS3900AL RF Cables................................................................................................................................326 7.10.1 RF Jumper............................................................................................................................................326 7.10.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable.................................................................................................................327
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
ix
1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description
1
04 (2012-08-05)
Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description.
This is the fourth official release. Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), this issue does not include any new information. Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), this issue includes the following changes: Contents 3.3.9 LBBP 3.3.13 UTRP 3.3.6 GTMU Transmission Cable Connections for a SingleMode Base Station Change Description Added the information of combined bandwidths. Deleted the UTRPb4 used in LTE mode. Added the TRX specifications of the board. Changed the description of transmission over the E1 Cable for LTE only scenario.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-06-29), the following information is deleted from this issue: l l MRFU V3 RF Cable Connections for MRFU V3
03 (2012-06-29)
This is the third official release. Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), this issue includes the following new information: l l 3.1.5 WRFUe RF Cable Connections for WRFUe
Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), this issue includes the following changes:
Issue 2012-08-05 (04) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1
Contents 3.3.14 USCU 7.6.1 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet 7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries 7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable 7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable 7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable 7.7.6 FE/GE Ethernet Cable 7.7.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable 7.9.2 BBU Alarm Cable 7.9.17 GPS Jumper
Change Description Added the information of the USCUb14 and the USCUb22. Added the length of cables.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), no information is deleted from this issue.
02 (2012-06-20)
This is the second official release. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), this issue does not include any new information. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), this issue includes the following changes: Contents 3.3.8 WBBP 3.3.9 LBBP 3.3.14 USCU 4.3 PDU05A Added the specifications of the SOU. Change Description Added the description of silkscreens on the boards.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), no information is deleted from this issue.
01 (2012-04-25)
This is the first official release. Compared with issue draft B (2012-03-20), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with issue draft B (2012-03-20), this issue includes the following changes: Contents 3.3.4 WMPT 3.3.5 UMPT 3.3.6 GTMU 3.3.7 LMPT 3.3.8 WBBP 3.3.9 LBBP 3.3.10 FAN 3.3.11 UPEU 3.3.13 UTRP 3.3.14 USCU 3.3.15 UBRI 3.3.16 UCIU Transmission Cable Connections for a TripleMode Base Station 7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries Added Transmission Cable Connections in the GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded) scenario. Changed the specification of input power cables for batteries to 50 mm2 (0.077 in.2) low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) cables. Change Description Changed the description of the indicators on the boards.
Compared with issue draft B (2012-03-20), no information is deleted from this issue.
Draft B (2012-03-20)
This is the draft. Compared with issue draft A (2012-02-10), this issue includes the following new information: l l l 3.1.8 CRFUd 4.9 DCDU-03B RF Cable Connections for CRFUd
Compared with issue draft A (2012-02-10), this issue includes the following changes: Contents 4.2 Power Distribution for BTS3900AL Cabinets Change Description Changed the specification of the AC circuit breaker for the HAU to 25 A.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Contents 7.1 List of BTS3900AL Cables
Change Description Reconnected the input power cable for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet to the RTN(+)_2 and NEG(-)_2 terminals on the PDU03D.
Compared with issue draft A (2012-02-10), no information is deleted from this issue.
Draft A (2012-02-10)
This is the draft.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
2
About This Chapter
BTS3900AL Cabinet
This chapter describes the exteriors, boards, modules, and configurations of BTS3900AL cabinets, providing reference for planning and deploying BTS3900AL sites. 2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet This section describes the exterior of the BTS3900AL cabinet. 2.2 Interior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet This section describes the interior of the BTS3900AL cabinet. 2.3 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900AL Cabinet Multiple BTS3900AL cabinets can be combined to meet the requirements for different radio frequency unit (RFU) configurations, backup power capacities, and space required for customer equipment. 2.4 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications BTS3900AL engineering specifications include input power specifications and equipment specifications. 2.5 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment If customer equipment is installed in the Huawei cabinet, requirements concerning dimension, heat dissipation, and temperature must be met.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet

This section describes the exterior of the BTS3900AL cabinet. The BTS3900AL cabinet uses a heat exchanger for heat dissipation. The BTS3900AL cabinet includes equipments such as the baseband unit (BBU), transmission equipment, power equipment and radio frequency units (RFUs). By default, cables are routed through cable conduits in the base of the cabinet and out of the BTS3900AL cabinet from the front lower part. The BTS3900AL cabinet is white. Figure 2-1 shows the exterior of the BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 2-1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL cabinet
2.2 Interior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet

This section describes the interior of the BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 2-2 shows the interior of the BTS3900AL AC cabinet, and Table 2-1 describes the components in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-2 Interior of the BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Table 2-1 Components in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet No. Compo nent Option al or Mandat ory Mandato ry Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet 1 Description
ETP
The embedded telecommunication power (ETP) system converts AC power into DC power and supplies power to devices inside the cabinet. The ETP consists of the ETP subrack, power monitoring unit (PMU), and power supply units (PSUs). A PSU converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices.
2 3
PSU CCU
Mandato ry Mandato ry
7 1
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
No.
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory Mandato ry
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet 1
Description
Surge protecti on subrack for transmi ssion signals DCDU11C
The universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) can be configured in the subrack to provide surge protection for transmission signals.
Mandato ry
The direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) provides ten DC outputs for the BBU, CCU, and central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) in the cabinet. The PMU manages the power system and batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enables the base station and the base station controller to interact. The DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B provides power for remote radio units (RRUs). If only one DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B is required, it is installed in the left slot. Filler modules need to be installed in the 11 U (488.95 mm or 19.25 in.) space reserved for customer equipment. l The environment monitoring unit (EMUA) or signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is optional, and is preferentially installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space below the lower BBU. The SLPU is used as a drycontact signal protection unit. l The built-in storage battery groups need to be installed in the lowest 7 U (311.15 mm or 12.25 in.) space. One storage battery group consists of four storage batteries. l When the lowest 7 U (311.15 mm or 12.25 in.) space is used, the three baffle bars installed in the 7 U space need to be removed.
PMU
Mandato ry Mandato ry Optional
BBU39 00 DCDU11B/ DCDU03B Filler module
Mandato ry
11
10
DCDU11A
Mandato ry
The DCDU-11A provides 10 DC outputs for the radio frequency unit (RFU) and fan assembly unit (FAU).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
No.
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory Mandato ry
Description
11
FAU
The FAU, a fan assembly for the RF compartment, has three fans and a central monitoring unit type F (CMUF). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF provides the following functions: temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identification. The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, as well as combines and divides signals. The power distribution unit-05A (PDU05A) provides AC power for the ETP, service outlet unit (SOU), and heater assembly unit (HAU). The CMUF provides the following functions: heat exchanger control, fan speed adjustment, and ELU identification. The HAU ensures that components in the cabinet work in the acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. The heat exchanger (HEX) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range. The HEX consists of inner air circulation fans, outer air circulation fans, and the heat exchanger core. The holder stores documents.
12
RFU
Mandato ry Mandato ry Mandato ry Optional
13
PDU05 A CMUF
14
15
HAU
16
HEX
Mandato ry
17
Docum ent holder
Mandato ry
The BTS3900AL DC cabinet has the same type of door as the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Figure 2-3 shows the interior of the BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and Table 2-2 describes the components in the BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-3 Interior of the BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Table 2-2 Components in the BTS3900AL DC cabinet No. Compon ent Option al or Manda tory Mandat ory Mandat ory Mandat ory Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet 1 Description
Filler panel CCU
The filler panel is exclusively used for cabinets and cannot be disassembled or replaced. The CCU monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices. The UELP or UFLP can be configured in the subrack to provide surge protection for transmission signals.
Surge protection subrack for transmissi on signals DCDU-11 C
Mandat ory
The DCDU-11C provides ten DC outputs for the BBU, CCU, and CMUF in the cabinet.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
10
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
No.
Compon ent
Option al or Manda tory Mandat ory
Description
Filler module
The highest 4 U (177.8 mm or 7 in.) space is reserved. The lowest 11 U (488.95 mm or 19.25 in.) space is reserved for customer equipment. The DCDU-11A provides 10 DC outputs for the RFU and FAU. The FAU, a fan assembly for the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF provides the following functions: temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identification. The RFU performs the following functions: modulation and demodulation of baseband signals and RF signals, data processing, as well as signal combination and division. The power distribution unit-03D (PDU03D) provides DC power for the DCDU-11C and BusBar.
6 7
DCDU-11 A FAU
Mandat ory Mandat ory
1 1
RFU
Mandat ory
PDU03D
Mandat ory
Table 2-3 describes other components in the BTS3900AL cabinet. Table 2-3 Other components in the BTS3900AL cabinet Compone nt Optiona l or Mandat ory Mandator y Mandator y Optional Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet 1 Description
Door status sensor Temperatu re sensor GPS surge protector
The door status sensor, which is installed on the cabinet door, monitors the status (open or closed) of the cabinet door. Temperature sensors monitor the temperature in a cabinet. The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It is installed in a designated position on the left of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.
3 1
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
11
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Compone nt
Optiona l or Mandat ory Mandator y
Description
ELU
The electronic label unit (ELU) automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the right of the equipment compartment. The cabinet lamp provides lighting during maintenance. The SOU transfers AC power to equipment.
Cabinet lamp SOU
Optional Optional
1 1
2.3 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900AL Cabinet

Multiple BTS3900AL cabinets can be combined to meet the requirements for different radio frequency unit (RFU) configurations, backup power capacities, and space required for customer equipment.
2.3.1 Application Scenario of a BTS3900AL Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
This section describes the application scenario of a BTS3900AL cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Rules for Configuring the Cabinet

l l A BTS3900AL site can be configured with a maximum of 18 RFUs. Therefore, more than 18 RFUs must be configured at more than one BTS3900AL site. A BTS3900AL site can be configured with a maximum of two BTS3900AL cabinets (one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet). The two cabinets must be installed side by side. The BTS3900AL AC cabinet is installed on the left, and the BTS3900AL DC cabinet is installed on the right. A BTS3900AL site can be configured with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T cabinet. A BTS3900AL site can be configured with only one TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet. If auxiliary cabinets such as storage battery cabinets IBBS700D/IBBS700T or transmission cabinets TMC11H (Ver.C) are required during site deployment, the auxiliary cabinets are installed on the left and the primary cabinets are installed on the right.
NOTE
l l l
For details about an IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet, see the IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual. For details about a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet, see the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description.
Cabinet Configurations for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. If six to nine RFUs are configured, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet is
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
required. If more than nine RFUs are configured, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are required. Table 2-4 describes the cabinet configurations in the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply Backup Power Requireme nt Space Required for Customer Equipme nt 11 U (488.95 mm or 19.25 in.) 22 U (977.9 mm or 38.5 in.) Short-term backup power 4U (177.8 mm or 7 in.) 15 U (666.75 mm or 26.25 in.) Medium- to long-term backup power 11 U (488.95 mm or 19.25 in.) 22 U (977.9 mm or 38.5 in.) Carrier Configur ation Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC power
No backup power
9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
18 RFUs 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet
9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet
18 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet, one IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet, and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
13
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
CAUTION
If short-term backup power is required, a group of four storage batteries needs to be configured in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring built-in storage batteries are as follows: l l l l The ambient temperature of the cabinet must be lower than 40C. Built-in storage batteries must be used in a first-class power grid, where the average poweroff time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours. An Enersys or Nothstar 92 Ah battery group must be used to meet the high-current discharge requirement. The maximum power consumption of a site must be less than or equal to 10,000 W.
If medium- to long-term backup power is required, storage battery cabinets need to be configured outside. The requirement for configuring an external storage battery cabinet is as follows: l An external storage battery cabinet must provide a minimum of 300 Ah power. Therefore, a minimum of two groups of 150 Ah storage batteries must be configured.
A base station cannot be configured with both built-in storage batteries and external storage battery cabinets. If a site does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when a site has no backup power
If a site has short-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-5.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
14
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when a site has shortterm backup power
If a site has medium- to long-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dualmode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-6.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
15
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when a site has medium- to long-term backup power
Cabinet Configurations for a Triple-Mode Base Station

A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, which are installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
NOTE
When the two BBUs are interconnected to achieve the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes, BBU0 is the root BBU, and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
In the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station are the same as those for a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Table 2-4. If a site does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-7.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
16
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station when a site has no backup power
If a site has short-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station when a site has short-term backup power
If a site has medium- to long-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-9.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
17
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station when a site has medium- to long-term backup power
2.3.2 Application Scenario of a BTS3900AL Cabinet Configured with Both RFUs and RRUs
This section describes the application scenario of a BTS3900AL cabinet configured with both RFUs and RRUs.
Rules for Configuring the Cabinet

l l l l A BTS3900AL site can be configured with a maximum of nine RFUs and nine RRUs and only one BTS3900AL AC cabinet. A BTS3900AL site can be configured with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T cabinet. A BTS3900AL site can be configured with only one TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet. If auxiliary cabinets such as storage battery cabinets IBBS700D/IBBS700T or transmission cabinets TMC11H (Ver.C) are required during site deployment, the auxiliary cabinets are installed on the left and the primary cabinets are installed on the right.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

NOTE
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
For details about an IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet, see the IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual. For details about a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet, see the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description.
Cabinet Configurations for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Table 2-5 describes the cabinet configurations in the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply Backup Power Requirement Space Required for Customer Equipment 11 U (488.95 mm or 19.25 in.) 4 U (177.8 mm or 7 in.) 15 U (666.75 mm or 26.25 in.) Medium- to long-term backup power 11 U (488.95 mm or 19.25 in.) Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC power
No backup power Short-term backup power
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet One BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet One BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
19
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
CAUTION
If short-term backup power is required, a group of four storage batteries needs to be configured in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring built-in storage batteries are as follows: l l l l The ambient temperature of the cabinet must be lower than 40C. Built-in storage batteries must be used in a first-class power grid, where the average poweroff time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours. An Enersys or Nothstar 92 Ah battery group must be used to meet the high-current discharge requirement. The maximum power consumption of a site must be less than or equal to 10,000 W.
If medium- to long-term backup power is required, storage battery cabinets need to be configured outside. The requirement for configuring an external storage battery cabinet is as follows: l An external storage battery cabinet must provide a minimum of 300 Ah power. Therefore, a minimum of two groups of 150 Ah storage batteries must be configured.
A base station cannot be configured with both built-in storage batteries and external storage battery cabinets. If a site does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when a site has no backup power
If a site has short-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-11.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
20
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when a site has shortterm backup power
If a site has medium- to long-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dualmode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-12.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
21
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station when a site has medium- to long-term backup power
Cabinet Configurations for a Triple-Mode Base Station

A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, which are installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
NOTE
When the two BBUs are interconnected to achieve the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes, BBU0 is the root BBU, and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
In the case of different backup power requirements, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station are the same as those for a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Table 2-5. If a site does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-13.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
22
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station when a site has no backup power
If a site has short-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-14.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
23
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station when a site has short-term backup power
If a site has medium- to long-term backup power, the cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-15.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
24
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations for a triple-mode base station when a site has medium- to long-term backup power
2.4 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications

BTS3900AL engineering specifications include input power specifications and equipment specifications.
Input Power Specifications

Table 2-6 lists the input power specifications of a BTS3900AL. Table 2-6 Input power specifications of a BTS3900AL Input Power 220 V AC (single-phase) 220 V AC (three-phase) 110 V AC (dual-live-wire) Voltage Range 176 V DC to 290 V DC 176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC 105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
Equipment Specifications
Table 2-7 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL. Table 2-7 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL Item Dimension (H x W x D) Specification 1925 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (with the base) Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Item Weight
Specification 550 kg (full configuration, with the base and full configuration of storage batteries, and without transmission devices)
NOTE
Other engineering specifications of BTS3900AL, see 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.
2.5 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment

If customer equipment is installed in the Huawei cabinet, requirements concerning dimension, heat dissipation, and temperature must be met.
Requirements of Customer Equipment Specifications

Customer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements: l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-16): The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standard equipment. The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment supports natural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of the customer equipment is 250 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back. A maximum cabling space in front of the panel is 100 mm. l Requirement for air vents: If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to back. If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation. l Requirement for temperature: Table 2-8 Temperature requirements for user equipment Highest Environmental Temperature Equal to or lower than 40 C Higher than 40C Lowest Operating Temperature of the User Equipment Highest Operating Temperature of the User Equipment
Equal to or lower than -10 Equal to or higher than 55 C C Equal to or lower than -10 Equal to or higher than 60 C C
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
26
2 BTS3900AL Cabinet
Figure 2-16 Requirements for customer equipment dimension and ventilation
(1) Customer equipment with natural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment with air vents on the right and left
(3) Customer equipment with air vents on the front and back
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
27
3 BTS3900AL Modules
3
About This Chapter
BTS3900AL Modules
A BTS3900AL cabinet consists of the following modules: RFU, RRU, BBU3900, SLPU, and EMUA. 3.1 RFU This section describes an RFU in a BTS3900AL cabinet. 3.2 RRU The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna system. 3.3 BBU3900 Components This section describes the boards and modules of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration rules, functions, ports, indicators, and DIP switches. 3.4 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals The UELP or UFLP can be optionally configured to provide surge protection for transmission signals. 3.5 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is optional and is configured with two USLP2s. 3.6 GPS Surge Protector The Global Positioning System (GPS) surge protector protects the satellite receiver from lightning. 3.7 DDF The digital distribution frame (DDF) is optional and can be installed in the customer equipment space in the BTS3900AL or TMC11H(Ver.C). 3.8 EMUA The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
28
3 BTS3900AL Modules
3.1 RFU
This section describes an RFU in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
3.1.1 DRFU
Double radio frequency unit (DRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM only scenario.
Panel
Figure 3-1 shows the DRFU panel. Figure 3-1 DRFU panel
Function
The DRFU performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing for baseband signals and radio frequency (RF) signals. In addition, the DRFU provides the following functions:
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
29
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals for the GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmitted to the antenna system through the duplexer. Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to a baseband unit (BBU) for further processing. Performs power control. Performs reverse power detection. Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops. Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l
A DRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and dual-duplexer. Figure 3-2 shows the logical structure of the DRFU. Figure 3-2 Logical structure of the DRFU
Indicators
There are six indicators on the DRFU panel, indicating its operating status. Table 3-1 describes the status of the indicators on the DRFU. Table 3-1 Status of the Indicators on the DRFU Indicator RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
30
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicator
Color
Status Off
Description There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled. The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT1 port. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT2 port. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT1 and ANT2 ports. No VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
31
ALM
Red
Steady on
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Off ACT Green Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) VSWR Red Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off CPRI0 Red and green Steady green Steady red Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
CPRI1
Red and green
Steady green Steady red Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Ports
Table 3-2 describes the ports on the DRFU. Table 3-2 Ports on the DRFU Port Type Port for transceiving RF signals CPRI port Silkscreen on the Port ANT1 ANT2 CPRI0 Connector Type DIN female connector SFP female connector Description Connects to the antenna system.
Connects to a lower-level radio frequency unit (RFU) during the cascading. Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level RFU in the cascading mode.
CPRI1 Interconnecti on port for receiving RF signals RX1/IN RX1/OUT RX2/IN RX2/OUT Power supply port PWR 3V3 power connector QMA female connector
Receives the diversity signals in antenna channel 1. Transmits the diversity signals in antenna channel 1. Receives the diversity signals in antenna channel 2. Transmits the diversity signals in antenna channel 2. Feeds in power.
3.1.2 GRFU
GSM radio frequency unit (GRFU) is an RF unit of GSM radio filter and applies to GSM only scenario.
Panel
GRFUs fall into three types: GRFU V1, GRFU V2, and GRFU V2a. The three types of GRFUs can be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-3, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label of a GRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a GRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a GRFU V2a.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
32
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-3 GRFU panel
Function
A GRFU performs modulation and demodulation between baseband signals and radio frequency (RF) signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. In addition,the GRFU has the following functions: l Converts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals for the GSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmitted to the antenna system through the duplexer. Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After an amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to the baseband unit (BBU) for further processing. Provides power control and VSWR detection. Performs reverse power detection. Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops. Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l
Principles
A GRFU consists of a high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and dual-duplexer. Figure 3-4 shows the logical structure of the GRFU.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-4 Logical structure of the GRFU
Indicators
The six indicators on the GRFU panel indicate the operating status of the GRFU. Table 3-3 describes the indicators on the GRFU panel. Table 3-3 Indicators on the GRFU Panel Indicato r RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off ALM Red Steady on
Off ACT Green Steady on
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
34
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicato r
Color
Status Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Description The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. A VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT_RXB port. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB port. No VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
VSWR
Red
Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off
CPRI0
Red and green
CPRI1
Red and green
Ports
Table 3-4 describes the ports on the GRFU panel. Table 3-4 Ports on the GRFU Panel Port Type RF port Silkscree n ANT_RX B ANT_TX/ RXA
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Connector Type DIN connector DIN connector
Description Connects to the antenna system Connects to the antenna system
35
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Port Type CPRI port
Silkscree n CPRI0 CPRI1
Connector Type SFP female connector SFP female connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector
Description Connects to the BBU, or an upper-level RFU in the cascading mode Connects to a lower-level RFU during the cascading Receives the diversity signals Transmits the main signals Feeds in power Port for monitoring and commissioning
Interconnectio n port for receiving RF signals Power supply port Monitoring port
RX_INB RX_OUT A PWR MON
3.1.3 WRFU
WCDMA Radio Frequency (WRFU) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and applies to UMTS only scenario.
Panel
Figure 3-5 shows the panel of the WRFU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
36
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-5 Panel of the WRFU
Functions
The functions of the WRFU are as follows: l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the transmit channel. The baseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified or being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna for radio transmission. Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital downconversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing. Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection Provides reverse power detection Provides frequency synthesis and loopback test Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms Supports 40 W (2 carriers) and 80 W (4 carriers) power outputs
l l l l l
Principle
The WRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and duplex unit. Figure 3-6 shows the principle of the WRFU.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-6 Principle of the WRFU
LEDs
Table 3-5 describes the LEDs on the WRFU panel. Table 3-5 LEDs on the WRFU panel Label RUN Color Green ON State Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled. The module works properly with the TX channel disabled.
38
OFF Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red ON
OFF ACT Green ON Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Label VSWR
Color Red
State ON (red) Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) OFF (red)
Description VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT/RXB port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT/ RXB ports. No VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI links are normal. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP is out of position, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI links are normal. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP is out of position, or the optical module is powered off.
CPRI0
Red/Green
On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) OFF
CPRI1
Red/Green
On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) OFF
Ports
Table 3-6 describes the ports on the WRFU panel. Table 3-6 Ports on the WRFU panel Port RF port Label ANT_RXB ANT_TX/ RXA CPRI CPRI0 CPRI1 Connector DIN connector DIN connector SFP female connector SFP female connector Description RF RX port for connecting to the antenna system RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system Connected to the BBU, or the upper-level WRFU during the cascading Connected to the lower-level WRFU during the cascading
39
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Port Interconnectio n port for RF RX signals
Label RX_INB RX_OUTA PWR MON
Connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector
Description Receives the diversity signals. Transmits the main signals. Feeding power Port for monitoring and commissioning
Power supply socket Monitoring port
3.1.4 WRFUd
WCDMA Radio Frequency Unit Type D (WRFUd) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and applies to UMTS only scenario.
Panel
Figure 3-7 shows a WRFUd panel. Figure 3-7 WRFUd panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
40
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Functions
The functions of the WRFUd are as follows: l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the TX channel. The baseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified or being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna for radio transmission. Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing. Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection. Performs reverse power detection. Synthesizes frequencies and loop tests. Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l
Principle
The WRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier (PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-8 shows the logical structure of the WRFUd. Figure 3-8 Logical structure of the WRFUd
LEDs
Table 3-7 describes the LEDs on the WRFUd panel.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
41
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-7 LEDs on the WRFUd panel LED RUN Color Green Status On Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled. The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXB port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/ RXB ports. No VSWR-related alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red On
Off ACT Green On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) VSWR Red On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off CPRI0 Red and green On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
42
3 BTS3900AL Modules
LED CPRI1
Color Red and green
Status On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
Description The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
Ports
Table 3-8 describes the ports on the WRFUd panel. Table 3-8 Ports on the WRFUd panel Port RF port Label ANT_TX/ RXB ANT_TX/ RXA CPRI port CPRI0 CPRI1 Interconnectio n port for receiving RF signals Power supply socket Monitoring port RX_INB RX_OUTA PWR MON Connector DIN connector DIN connector SFP female connector SFP female connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector Port for connecting to the BBU, or the upper-level WRFUd during the cascading Port for connecting to the lower-level WRFUd during the cascading Input port of diversity signals in the antenna channel Output port of diversity signals in the antenna channel Socket for feeding power Port for monitoring and commissioning Description RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system
3.1.5 WRFUe
WCDMA Radio Frequency Unit Type E (WRFUe) is an RF unit of WCDMA radio filter and applies to UMTS only scenario.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
43
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Panel
Figure 3-9 shows a WRFUe panel. Figure 3-9 WRFUe panel
Functions
The functions of the WRFUe are as follows: l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the TX channel. The baseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplified or being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antenna for radio transmission. Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to intermediate frequency (IF) signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing. Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detection. Performs reverse power detection. Synthesizes frequencies and loop tests. Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
44
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Principle
The WRFUe consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier (PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-10 shows the logical structure of the WRFUe. Figure 3-10 Logical structure of the WRFUe
LEDs
Table 3-9 describes the LEDs on the WRFUe panel. Table 3-9 LEDs on the WRFUe panel LED RUN Color Green Status On Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated.
45
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red On
Off
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
LED ACT
Color Green
Status On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Description The module works properly with the TX channel enabled. The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXB port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/ RXB ports. No VSWR-related alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
VSWR
Red
On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off
CPRI0
Red and green
On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
CPRI1
Red and green
Ports
Table 3-10 describes the ports on the WRFUe panel. Table 3-10 Ports on the WRFUe panel Port RF port Label ANT_TX/ RXB Connector DIN connector Description RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
46
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Port
Label ANT_TX/ RXA
Connector DIN connector SFP female connector SFP female connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector
Description
CPRI port
CPRI0 CPRI1
Port for connecting to the BBU, or the upper-level WRFUe during the cascading Port for connecting to the lower-level WRFUe during the cascading Input port of diversity signals in the antenna channel Output port of diversity signals in the antenna channel Socket for feeding power Port for monitoring and commissioning
Interconnectio n port for receiving RF signals Power supply socket Monitoring port
RX_INB RX_OUTA PWR MON
3.1.6 LRFU
LTE Radio Frequency Unit (LRFU) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex (FDD) and applies to LTE Only scenario.
Panel
Figure 3-11 shows the panel of the LRFU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
47
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-11 Panel of the LRFU
Functions
The LRFU processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boards or modules. Figure 3-12 shows the logical structure of the LRFU. Figure 3-12 Logical structure of the LRFU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
48
3 BTS3900AL Modules
LEDs
Table 3-11 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFU. Table 3-11 LEDs on the LRFU Label RUN Color Green Status On Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly (TX channel enabled). The module is running (TX channel disabled). A VSWR-related alarm is generated at the ANT_TX/RXA port. A VSWR-related alarm is generated at the ANT_TX/RXB port. A VSWR-related alarm is generated at the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/ RXB ports. No VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI links are normal. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red On
Off ACT Green On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) VSWR Red On (red) Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off (red) CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
49
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Label
Color
Status Off
Description The SFP module is out of position, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI links are normal. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is out of position, or the optical module is powered off.
CPRI1
Red/Green
Port
Table 3-12 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFU. Table 3-12 Ports on the panel of the LRFU Port RF port Label ANT_T X/RXB ANT_T X/RXA CPRI port CPRI0 Connector DIN connector DIN connector SFP female connector SFP female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0 port and CPRI1 port work in mutual backup mode. Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1 port and CPRI0 port work in mutual backup mode. Used for feeding -48 V DC input power Description RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system
CPRI1
PWR
MON
Port for monitoring and commissioning
3.1.7 LRFUe
LTE Radio Frequency Unit Type E (LRFUe) is an RF unit of LTE Frenquency Division Duplex (FDD) and applies to LTE only scenario.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
50
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Panel
Figure 3-13 shows the panel of the LRFUe. Figure 3-13 Panel of the LRFUe
Functions
The LRFUe processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boards or modules. Figure 3-14 shows the logical structure of the LRFUe.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
51
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-14 Logical structure of the LRFUe
LEDs
Table 3-13 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFUe. Table 3-13 LEDs on the LRFUe Label RUN Color Green Status On Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled.
Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red On
Off ACT Green On
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
52
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Label
Color
Description The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. A VSWR-related alarm is generated at the ANT_TX/RXA port. A VSWR-related alarm is generated at the ANT_TX/RXB port. A VSWR-related alarm is generated at the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/ RXB ports. No VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI links are normal. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is out of position, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI links are normal. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is out of position, or the optical module is powered off.
VSWR
Red
On (red) Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off (red)
CPRI0
Red/Green
CPRI1
Red/Green
Port
Table 3-14 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFUe. Table 3-14 Ports on the panel of the LRFUe Port RF port Label ANT_TX/ RXB ANT_TX/ RXA Interconnecti on port for
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Connector DIN connector DIN connector QMA female connector
Description RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system
RX_INB
Input port for diversity RX
53
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Port receiving RF signals CPRI port
Label RX_OUTA CPRI0
Connector QMA female connector SFP female connector SFP female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector
Description Output port for main RX Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0 port and CPRI1 port work in mutual backup mode. Used for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1 port and CPRI0 port work in mutual backup mode. Used for feeding -48 V DC input power Port for monitoring and commissioning
CPRI1
PWR MON
3.1.8 CRFUd
CDMA radio frequency unit type D (CRFUd) is an RF unit of LTE Frequency Division Duplex (LTE FDD) and applies to LTE only scenarios.
Panel
Figure 3-15 shows the CRFUd panel. Figure 3-15 CRFUd panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
54
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Functions
The CRFUd performs the following functions: l Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital downconversion, and matched filtering, the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing. Receives DL baseband signals from the BBU, filters DL signals, performs digital-to-analog conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band. Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
l l
Principles
The CRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and duplex unit. Figure 3-16 shows the logic structure of the CRFUd. Figure 3-16 Logic structure of the CRFUd
Indicators
Table 3-15 describes the indicators on the CRFUd panel. Table 3-15 Indicators on the CRFUd panel Indicato r RUN Color Green Status Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Description There is power supply, but the CRFUd is faulty or the version is being checked. The CRFUd works properly. The CRFUd is loading software.
55
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicato r
Color
Status Steady off
Description There is no power supply or the CRFUd is faulty. Alarms (not including VSWR-related alarms) are generated and the CRFUd needs to be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, you must locate the fault before replacing the CRFUd. No alarm (not including VSWR-related alarms) is generated. The CRFUd works properly with the TX channel enabled. The CRFUd works properly with the TX channel disabled. A VSWR-related alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. A VSWR-related alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXB port. A VSWR-related alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports. No VSWR-related alarm is generated. The CPRI link is functioning properly. The optical module fails to receive signals. The CPRI link is out of lock. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is functioning properly. The optical module fails to receive signals. The CPRI link is out of lock.
ALM
Red
Steady on
Steady off ACT Green Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) VSWR Red Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Steady off CPRI0 Red and green Steady green Steady red Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Steady off
CPRI1
Red and green
Steady green Steady red Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
56
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicato r
Color
Status Steady off
Description The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
Ports
Table 3-16 describes the ports on the CRFUd panel. Table 3-16 Ports on the CRFUd panel Port Type RF port Silkscreen ANT_TX/ RXB ANT_TX/ RXA Interconnecti on port for receiving RF signals CPRI port RX_INB RX_OUTA CPRI0 CPRI1 Power supply socket Monitoring port PWR MON Connector DIN connector DIN connector QMA female QMA female SFP female connector SFP female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector Receives diversity signals in the antenna channel. Transmits diversity signals in the antenna channel. Connects to the BBU. CPRI0 port and CPRI1 port work in mutual backup mode. Connects to the BBU. CPRI1 port and CPRI0 port work in mutual backup mode. Feeds -48 V DC input power. Used for monitoring and commissioning. Description Connects to the antenna system.
3.1.9 MRFU
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit (MRFU) is a type of RF unit that can work in multiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.
Panel
MRFUs fall into three types: MRFU V1, MRFU V2, and MRFU V2a. The three types of MRFUs can be identified by their labels. As shown in Figure 3-17, there is "V0" or "V1" on the label of a MRFU V1, there is "V2" on the label of a MRFU V2, and there is "V2a" on the label of a MRFU V2a.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-17 MRFU Panel
Function
The functions of MRFU are as follows: l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediate frequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals and then transmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer. Receives radio frequency (RF) signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to IF signals, and then transmits them to the baseband unit (BBU) after an amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and Digital Automatic Gain Control (DAGC). Performs power control. Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection. Supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier (TMA) and controls the remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna. Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals. Generates the common public radio interface (CPRI) clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l l
Principles
A MRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, and duplexer. Figure 3-18 shows the principle of the MRFU.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-18 Principle of the MRFU
Indicators
Table 3-17 describes the indicators on the MRFU. Table 3-17 Indicators on the MRFU Indicato r RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The MRFU works properly with the TX channel enabled.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off ALM Red Steady on
Off ACT Green Steady on
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
59
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicato r
Color
Description The MRFU works properly with the TX channel disabled. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. A VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT_RXB port. The VSWR alarm is generated on the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB port. No VSWR alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The optical module fails to receive signals. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
VSWR
Red
Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off
CPRI0
Red and green
CPRI1
Red and green
Ports
Table 3-18 describes the ports on the MRFU. Table 3-18 Port on the MRFU Port Type RF port Silkscreen ANT_RXB ANT_TX/ RXA
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Connector Type DIN connector DIN connector
Description RF RX port for connecting to the antenna system RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system
60
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Port Type CPRI port
Silkscreen CPRI0 CPRI1
Connector Type SFP female connector SFP female connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector
Description Connects to the BBU Connects to the BBU Receives the diversity signals Transmits the main signals Feeding -48 V DC power Port for monitoring and commissioning
Interconnectio n port for receiving RF signals Power supply port Monitoring port
3.1.10 MRFUd
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit Type D (MRFUd) is a type of RF unit that can work in multiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.
Panel
Figure 3-19 shows a MRFUd panel.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
61
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-19 MRFUd panel
Functions
The functions of the MRFUd are as follows: l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediate frequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals or combines the signals, and then transmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer. Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to IF signals, and performs amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC), and then transmits the signals to the BBU for further processing. Performs power control. Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection. Supplies power to the TMA and controls the RET antenna. Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals. Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l l
Principle
The MRFUd consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier (PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-20 shows the logical structure of the MRFUd.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-20 Logical structure of the MRFUd
LEDs
Table 3-19 describes the LEDs on the MRFUd panel. Table 3-19 LEDs on the MRFUd panel LED RUN Color Green Status On Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off ALM Red On
Off ACT Green On
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
63
3 BTS3900AL Modules
LED
Color
Description The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXB port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/ RXB ports. No VSWR-related alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
VSW R
Red
On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off
CPRI 0
Red and green
CPRI 1
Red and green
Ports
Table 3-20 describes the ports on the MRFUd panel. Table 3-20 Ports on the MRFUd panel Port RF port Label ANT_TX/ RXB ANT_TX/ RXA CPRI port CPRI0 Connector DIN connector DIN connector SFP female connector Port for connecting to the BBU Description RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
64
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Port
Label CPRI1
Connector SFP female connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector
Description Port for connecting to the BBU Input port for diversity RX Output port for main RX Socket for feeding -48 V DC power Port for monitoring and commissioning
Interconnectio n port for receiving RF signals Power supply socket Monitoring port
3.1.11 MRFUe
Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit Type E (MRFUe) is a type of RF unit that can work in multiple radio frequencies. It applies to scenarios such as GO, UO, LO, GU and GL.
Panel
Figure 3-21 shows a MRFUe panel. Figure 3-21 MRFUe panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
65
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Functions
The functions of the MRFUe are as follows: l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the intermediate frequency (IF) signals, filters and amplifies the signals or combines the signals, and then transmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer. Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to IF signals, and performs amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC), and then transmits the signals to the BBU for further processing. Performs power control. Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ration (VSWR) detection. Supplies power to the TMA and controls the RET antenna. Controls Digital Predistortion (DPD) based on feedback signals. Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and detects alarms.
l l l l l
Principle
The MRFUe consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier (PA), and duplexer. Figure 3-22 shows the logical structure of the MRFUe. Figure 3-22 Logical structure of the MRFUe
LEDs
Table 3-21 describes the LEDs on the MRFUe panel.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
66
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-21 LEDs on the MRFUe panel LE D RU N Color Green Status On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off AL M Red On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description There is power supply, but the module breaks down or is verifying the software version. The module works properly. The module is loading software. There is no power supply, or the module breaks down. Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated, and the module must be replaced. Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related boards or ports. Therefore, the necessity for module replacement is uncertain. No alarm (excluding VSWR alarms) is generated. The module works properly with the TX channel enabled. The module works properly with the TX channel disabled. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT_TX/RXA port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on the ANT/RXB port. VSWR-related alarms are generated on both the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT/RXB ports. No VSWR-related alarm is generated. The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
Off ACT Green On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) VS WR Red On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Off CPR I0 Red and green On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
67
3 BTS3900AL Modules
LE D CPR I1
Color Red and green
Status On (green) On (red) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Off
Description The CPRI link is available. The reception of the optical module is abnormal, and an alarm is generated. The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error. The SFP module is not properly installed, or the optical module is powered off.
Ports
Table 3-22 describes the ports on the MRFUe panel. Table 3-22 Ports on the MRFUe panel Port RF port Label ANT/ RXB ANT_T X/RXA CPRI port CPRI0 CPRI1 Interconnection port for receiving RF signals RX_IN B RX_OU TA PWR MON Connector DIN connector DIN connector SFP female connector SFP female connector QMA female connector QMA female connector 3V3 power connector RJ45 connector Description RF RX port for connecting to the antenna system RF TX/RX port for connecting to the antenna system Port for connecting to the BBU Port for connecting to the BBU Input port for diversity RX Output port for main RX Socket for feeding -48 V DC power Port for monitoring and commissioning
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna system. The RRU implements the following functions:
3 BTS3900AL Modules
l l
Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the communication between the BBU and the RRU. The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D) conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band. Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.
3.3 BBU3900 Components

This section describes the boards and modules of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration rules, functions, ports, indicators, and DIP switches.
3.3.1 BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high. The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.) (H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-23. Figure 3-23 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used during base station commissioning. l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-24.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
69
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-24 ESN (1)
If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-25. Figure 3-25 ESN (2)
3.3.2 BBU3900 Functions

The BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station. The BBU3900 performs the following functions: l l l l l l l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC. Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs. Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade. Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate and maintain the base station. Processes uplink and downlink data. Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing. Provides the system clock.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
70
3 BTS3900AL Modules
3.3.3 BBU3900 Slot Assignment

This section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios: BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short), BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).
Slots in the BBU3900

Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-26. Figure 3-26 Slots in the BBU3900
BBU3900 GSM
Table 3-23 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM. Table 3-23 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM Board GTMU Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slots 5 and 6 Restriction It must be configured in slot 6, with both slots 5 and 6 occupied. It must be configured in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19.
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
71
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board USCU
Optional/ Mandatory Optional
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 0 or 1
Restriction It is referentially configured in slot 1. When configured with two satellite cards, it is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. It is preferentially configured in slot 4. -
UEIU UCIU
Optional Optional
1 1
Slot 18 Slot 0 or 4
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 3-27 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM. Figure 3-27 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM
BBU3900 UMTS
Table 3-24 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
72
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-24 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS Board WMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 2 Slot Slot 6 or 7 Restriction A single UMPT or WMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
73
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board WBBP
Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory
Maximum Number 6
Slot Slots 0 to 5
Restriction It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
74
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board FAN
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 16
Restriction It must be configured in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. A single UTRP is preferentially configured in slot 4. If more UTRPs are required, the UTRP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 4, 5, 0, 1, or 6. It is preferentially configured in slot 1. When configured with two satellite cards, it is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or 6
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
Figure 3-28 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS. Figure 3-28 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
75
3 BTS3900AL Modules
BBU3900 LTE
Table 3-25 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE. Table 3-25 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE Board LMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 2 Slot Slot 6 or 7 Restriction A single LMPT or UMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously. LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, 0, 4, or 5. FAN UPEU Mandatory Mandatory 1 2 Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19 It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 1
Slot 18 Slot 4 or 5
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
76
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board USCU
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
Restriction A single USCU is preferentially configured in slot 5. A USCU that occupies 1 U space is configured in slot 5 (with both slots 5 and 4 occupied). If slots 4 and 5 are occupied, a USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1, or a USCU that uses a dual-satellite card is configured in slot 1, with both slots 1 and 0 occupied.
Figure 3-29 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE. Figure 3-29 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE
BBU3900 GU
Table 3-26 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
77
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-26 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU Board WMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slot 7 Restriction The WMPT or UMPT is configured only in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously. GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
78
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board WBBP
Maximum Number 5
Slot Slots 0 to 4
Restriction It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, or 4. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
79
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board FAN UPEU
Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory
Maximum Number 1 2
Slot Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19
Restriction It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in GSM mode takes precedence over the UTRP in UMTS mode during slot assignment.
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 0 or 4
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. -
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 3-30 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU. Figure 3-30 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU
BBU3900 GL
Table 3-27 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-27 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL Board LMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slot 7 Restriction It is configured only in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously. GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied). A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, 0, or 4. FAN UPEU Mandatory Mandatory 1 2 Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19 It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in GSM mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 4
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 0 or 4
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
81
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board USCU
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 0, 1, or 4
Restriction It is preferentially configured in slot 4. -
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 3-31 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL. Figure 3-31 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL
BBU3900 UL
Table 3-28 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL. Table 3-28 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL Board LMPT/UMPT WMPT/UMPT LBBP Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 1 5 Slot Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5 Restriction It is configured only in slot 6. It is configured only in slot 7. A single LBBP is configured only in slot 2. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 2, 1, 0, 4, or 5.
82
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board WBBP
Maximum Number 5
Slot Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or 5
Restriction A single WBBP is configured only in slot 3. If more WBBPs are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is configured only in slot 3. The WBBP, which provides a maximum of six CPRI ports, is configured in either slot 2 or slot 3.
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in UMTS mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 4 or 5
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
83
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board USCU
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 4 or 5
Restriction It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
Figure 3-32 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL. Figure 3-32 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL
BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected). BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected). BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-29 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
84
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-29 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 Board WMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slot 7 Restriction The WMPT or UMPT is configured only in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously. GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
85
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board WBBP
Maximum Number 4
Slot Slots 0 to 3
Restriction It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, or 2. If a WBBPd is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that two WBBPs are installed in slots 2 and 3. At least one of the two WBBPs is WBBPd.
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. -
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
86
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board UTRP
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 0 or 1
Restriction It is preferentially configured in slot 0. It is preferentially configured in slot 0. -
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
UBRI UCIU
Optional Mandatory
1 1
Slot 2 Slot 4
Table 3-30 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTE mode. Table 3-30 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 Board UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 2 Slot Slot 6 or 7 Restriction A single UMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7. A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, 0, 4, or 5. FAN UPEU Mandatory Mandatory 1 2 Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19 It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. -
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
87
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board UTRP
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 4 or 5
Restriction It is preferentially configured in slot 4. A single USCU is preferentially configured in slot 5. A USCU that occupies 1 U space is configured in slot 5 (with both slots 5 and 4 occupied). If slots 4 and 5 are occupied, a USCU is preferentially configured in slot 1, or a USCU that uses a dual-satellite card is configured in slot 1, with both slots 1 and 0 occupied.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-31 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
88
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-31 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 Board LMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slot 7 Restriction It is configured only in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously. The UMPT must be configured as the main control board in the UCIU+UMPT cascading scenario. GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied). A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 1, 2, or 0. FAN UPEU Mandatory Mandatory 1 2 Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19 It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. -
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0 to slot 3
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
89
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board UTRP
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 0 or 1
Restriction It is preferentially configured in slot 0. The UTRP in GSM mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is preferentially configured in slot 0. When configured with two satellite cards, it is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UBRI UCIU board
Optional Mandatory
1 1
Slot 2 Slot 4
Table 3-32 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the UMTS mode. Table 3-32 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 Board UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 2 Slot Slot 6 or 7 Restriction A single UMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
90
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board WBBP
Maximum Number 6
Slot Slots 0 to 5
Restriction It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
91
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board FAN
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 16
Restriction It must be configured in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. A single UTRP is preferentially configured in slot 4. If more UTRPs are required, the UTRP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 4, 5, 0, 1, or 6. It is preferentially configured in slot 1. When configured with two satellite cards, it is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or 6
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
NOTE
BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-33 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
92
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-33 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 Board WMPT/UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slot 7 Restriction The WMPT or UMPT is configured only in slot 7. The UMPT and WMPT cannot be configured simultaneously. GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
93
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board WBBP
Maximum Number 4
Slot Slot 0 to slot 3
Restriction It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, or 2. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3 or 2. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that a WBBP is installed in each of slots 2 and 3. At least one of the WBBPs in slots 2 and 3 is WBBPd or WBBPf. The WBBPf takes precedence over the WBBPd during slot assignment.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
94
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board FAN UPEU
Maximum Number 1 2
Slot Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19
Restriction It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 0. The UTRP in GSM mode takes precedence over the UTRP in UMTS mode during slot assignment.
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 1
Slot 18 Slot 0 or 1
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is preferentially configured in slot 0. When configured with two satellite cards, it is configured in slot 1 (with both slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UBRI UCIU
Optional Mandatory
1 1
Slot 2 Slot 4
Table 3-34 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL. Table 3-34 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL Board UMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Number 1 Slot Slot 6 Restriction It is configured only in slot 6.
95
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board UMPT LBBP
Maximum Number 1 5
Slot Slot 7 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5
Restriction It is configured only in slot 7. A single LBBP is configured only in slot 2. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 2, 1, 0, 4, or 5. A single WBBP is configured only in slot 3. If more WBBPs are required, the WBBP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 3, 0, 1, 4, or 5. If a WBBPd or WBBPf is required, it is configured only in slot 3. The WBBP, which provides a maximum of six CPRI ports, is configured in either slot 2 or slot 3.
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or 5
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. -
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
96
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board UTRP
Maximum Number 1
Slot Slot 4 or 5
Restriction It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The UTRP in UMTS mode takes precedence over the UTRP in LTE mode during slot assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
NOTE
3.3.4 WMPT
The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-35 lists the WMPT specifications. Table 3-35 WMPT specifications Board WMPT Applicable Mode UMTS Transmissi on Mode ATM over E1/T1 or IP over E1/T1 Transmissio n over FE optical ports Transmissio n over FE electrical ports Number of ports 1 Port Capacity Four channels 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Full/HalfDuplex Full-duplex
Full-duplex
Full-duplex
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
97
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Panel
Figure 3-33 shows the panel of the WMPT. Figure 3-33 WMPT panel
Functions
The WMPT performs the following functions: l Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, and provides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000. Provides a reference clock for the system. Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900. Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade. Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP. Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.
l l l l l
Indicators
Table 3-36 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel. Table 3-36 Indicators on the WMPT panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is functioning properly. l Data or software is being loaded to the board. l The board is not started.
Steady off
On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen ALM
Color Red
Status Steady on
Description An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s
ACT
Green
Steady on Steady off
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The operation and maintenance link (OML) is disconnected. The board is being tested, such as an RRU Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) test through a USB(2)(3) flash drive.
On for 1s and off for 1s
In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, which indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-34.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
99
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-34 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel
Table 3-37 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel. Table 3-37 Port status indicators Indicator FE1 optical port status indicators Color Green (LINK on the left side) Status Steady on Steady off Orange (ACT on the right side) Blinking Description The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
FE0 electrical port status indicators
Green (LINK on the left side)
Orange (ACT on the right side)
Blinking
Steady off
ETH port indicators
Green (LINK on the left side)
Orange (ACT on the right side)
Blinking
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
100
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicator
Color
Status Steady off
Description No data is being transmitted or received.
Ports
Table 3-38 describes the ports on the WMPT panel. Table 3-38 Ports on the WMPT panel Silkscreen E1/T1 port FE0 FE1 GPS ETH(1) TST(2) USB(3) RST Connector DB26 female connector RJ45 connector SFP female connector SMA connector RJ45 connector USB connector USB connector Description E1/T1 port FE electrical port FE optical port Reserved Commissioning USB commissioning port USB loading port Used for resetting the WMPT
NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port. (2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration. (3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
DIP Switch
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/ T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different modes. Figure 3-35 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
101
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-35 DIP switch settings of the WMPT
Table 3-39 and Table 3-40 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT. Table 3-39 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT DIP Switch SW1 DIP Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON T1 The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm. The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm. Unavailable Description
ON
ON
ON
ON
Others
Table 3-40 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT DIP Switch SW2 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON Others 4 OFF ON Balanced Imbalanced Unavailable Description
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
102
3 BTS3900AL Modules
3.3.5 UMPT
The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages resources on other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications of the UMPT

The UMPT is classified into three types: UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table 3-41 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table 3-41 Specifications of the UMPT Board UMPTa1 Applicable Mode UMTS Transmissi on Mode ATM over E1/T1 or IP over E1/T1 Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports UMPTa2/ UMPTa6 LTE IP over E1/ T1 Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports Number of ports 1 Port Capacity Four channels 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s Full/HalfDuplex -
Full-duplex
Full- or halfduplex
1 1
Four channels 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Full- or halfduplex
Panel
Figure 3-36, Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-38 show the panels of the UMPT boards. Figure 3-36 UMPTa1 Panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
103
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-37 UMPTa2 Panel
Figure 3-38 UMPTa6 Panel
NOTE
In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.
Functions
The UMPT performs the following functions: l l l l l Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring, signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover. Controls all boards in the system. Provides the reference clock for the entire system. Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card. Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.
Ports
Table 3-42 describes the ports on the UMPT. Table 3-42 Ports on the UMPT Silkscreen FE/GE1 Connector SFP female connector Description A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet optical port is used for transmitting service data and signaling messages.
104
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen FE/GE0
Connector RJ45 connector
Description A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet electrical port is used for transmitting service data and signaling messages. The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used for the software upgrade of a base station using a USB flash driver. This port also functions as a commissioning Ethernet port(2). The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functions as the TOD clock or test clock port.
USB(1)
USB connector
E1/T1
DB26 female connector
The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs and outputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or between base station controllers. The GPS port on the UMPTa1 or UMPTa2 is reserved. The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used for transmitting radio frequency (RF) signals received from the antenna to the satellite card.
GPS
SMA connector
CI RST
SFP female connector -
The port is used for BBU interconnection. The port is used to reset the board.
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. (2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port before accessing the base station through the USB port.
Indicators
Table 3-43 describes the indicators on the UMPT. Table 3-43 Indicators on the UMPT Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
105
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Description The board is functioning properly. l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
ALM
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
ACT
Green
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The operation and maintenance link (OML) is disconnected. The board is being tested, such as an RRU Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) test through a USB(1) flash drive.
NOTE Of UMPT boards, only the UMPTa2 has this status.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
106
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status In every 4s, the indicator is on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s (eight times) in the first 2s and then off for 2s.
Description Services are not available.

NOTE Of UMPT boards, only the UMPTa2 has this status.
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status of the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. The indicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure 3-39. Figure 3-39 Indicators for ports
Table 3-44 describes the indicators. Table 3-44 Indicators for ports Indicator/ Silkscreen LINK (silkscreen for the optical port) Color Green Status Steady on Steady off ACT (silkscreen for the optical port) Orange Blinking Steady off LINK (silkscreen for the electrical port) Green Steady on Steady off ACT (silkscreen for the electrical port)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Definition The connection is normal. The connection is abnormal. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. The connection is normal. The connection is abnormal. Data is being transmitted.
107
Orange
Blinking
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicator/ Silkscreen
Color
Status Steady off
Definition No data is being transmitted. The interconnection link is normal. An optical module fails to receive signals because of one of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The optical cable is broken.
CI
Red or green
Steady green Steady red
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Cables are connected in one of following incorrect manners: l In the UCIU +UMPT scenario, the S0 port on the UCIU is connected to the CI port on the UMPT. Indicators for the S0 and CI ports are blinking. l The ports are connected in ring topology. Indicators for all incorrectly connected ports are blinking.
Steady off R0, R1, R2 L01 Red or green Red or green Steady off
The optical module cannot be detected. Reserved E1/T1 link 0 and 1 is not set up, or an LOS alarm is generated. E1/T1 links 0 and 1 are working properly.
Steady green
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
108
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Color
Status Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Definition E1/T1 link 0 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 1 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated. E1/T1 link 1 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 0 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated. Alarms are generated on E1/T1 links 0 and 1. An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 0. An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 1. E1/T1 link 2 and 3 is not set up, or an LOS alarm is generated. E1/T1 links 2 and 3 are working properly. E1/T1 link 2 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 3 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated. E1/T1 link 3 is working properly, but E1/T1 link 2 is not set up or an LOS alarm is generated. Alarms are generated on E1/T1 links 2 and 3. An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 2.
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Steady red
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) L23 Red or green Steady off
Steady green
Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Steady red
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
109
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Color
Status Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Definition An alarm is generated on E1/T1 link 3.
DIP Switch
Two DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-40 shows the positions of DIP switches on the UMPT. Figure 3-40 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT
Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions: l l SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-45 describes the DIP switch. SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-46 describes the DIP switch.
Table 3-45 DIP switch SW1 DIP Switch DIP Status 1 SW1 ON OFF ON 2 ON ON OFF The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohms. The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohms. The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohms. Description
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
110
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-46 DIP switch SW2 DIP Switch SW2 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Unbalanced Description
3.3.6 GTMU
The GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.
Specifications
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-47 lists the transmission specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-47 Transmission specifications of the GTMU Board GTMU/ GTMUb Supported Mode GSM Transmissi on Mode TDM over E1/T1 Transmissio n over FE optical ports Transmissio n over FE electrical ports Number of ports 1 1 Port Capacity Four channels 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Full/HalfDuplex Full-duplex Full-duplex
Full-duplex
Table 3-48 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-48 TRX specifications of the GTMU Board GTMU/GTMUb Supported Mode GSM Transmission Mode TDM IP over FE IP over E1 Maximum Carrier Number 126 60 48
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
111
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Panel
Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-42 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 3-41 GTMU panel
Figure 3-42 GTMUb panel
Functions
The GTMU performs the following functions: l l l l l l l l Controls, maintains, and operates the base station. Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and security management. Monitors the fans and power modules. Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode. Provides the clock output for test. Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system. Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals. Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Indicators
Table 3-49 describes the indicators on the GTMU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
112
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-49 Indicators on the GTMU Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s ALM Red Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. Software is being loaded to the board. An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. There is no fault. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. The OML is disconnected.
ACT
Green
Steady on On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-50 describes the indicators. Table 3-50 Indicators for ports Indicator LIU0 to LIU3 Color Green Status Steady on On for 1s and off for 1s Steady off CPRI0 to CPRI5 Red or green Steady green Description An E1/T1 local alarm is generated. An E1/T1 remote alarm is generated. The link is functional. The CPRI link is functioning properly.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
113
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicator
Color
Status Steady red
Description An optical module fails to receive or transmit signals because of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
The CPRI link is out of lock because of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l There is mismatched data rate over CPRI ports.
Steady off
l The optical module cannot be detected. l The CPRI cable is not connected.
ETH
Green (LINK indicator on the left side)
Steady on Steady off Blinking
The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received.
114
Orange (ACT indicator on the right side)
Steady off
FE0
Orange (ACT indicator on the right side)

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicator
Color
Status Steady off
Description No data is being transmitted or received. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. This is the indicator for the reserved port. This is the indicator for the reserved port.
FE1 (on the GTMUb)
Green (ACT indicator on the right side)
Steady off
M_S (on the GTMUb) EXT (on the GTMUb)
Ports
Table 3-51 describes the ports on the GTMU. Table 3-51 Ports on the GTMU Silkscreen CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female connector SFP female connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals. Reserved Local maintenance and commissioning port Connected to the routers in the equipment room through FE cables to transmit network information Connected to the routers in the equipment room through fiber optic cables to transmit network information Providing reference clock for the test instruments
EXT (on the GTMUb) ETH(1) FE0
FE1
DLC connector
TST(2)
USB connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
115
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen USB(3) E1/T1 RST
Connector USB connector DB26 female connector -
Description Used for automatic software upgrade through the USB flash drive Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs Used for resetting the GTMU
NOTE
DIP Switch
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows: l l l l l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-52 provides details on the DIP switch. S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-53 provides details on the DIP switch. S3 is reserved. S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-54 provides details on the DIP switch. S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-55 provides details on the DIP switch.
Table 3-52 Description on S1 DIP Switch S1 DIP Setting 1 ON OFF ON 2 ON ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF Others 4 OFF OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm. The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm. The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohm. Unavailable Description
NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site. The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
116
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-53 Description on S2 DIP Switch S2 DIP Setting 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF All the bits are set to OFF by default in all modes. When error codes are received over the four E1 RX links in 75 ohm, all the bits of S2 must be set to ON to rectify the faults on the E1 links. Unavailable Description
ON
ON
ON
ON
Others
Table 3-54 Description on S4 DIP Switch S4 DIP Setting 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF Others 4 ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass Not supporting E1 bypass Unavailable Description
Table 3-55 Description on S5 DIP Switch S5 DIP Setting 1 ON OFF 2 ON ON 3 ON ON 4 ON OFF Not supporting E1 bypass Supporting E1 bypass of level-1 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-2 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-3 cascaded BTSs
117
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
DIP Switch
DIP Setting 1 ON 2 ON 3 OFF 4 OFF
Description
Supporting E1 bypass of level-4 cascaded BTSs Supporting E1 bypass of level-5 cascaded BTSs
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
3.3.7 LMPT
The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-56 lists the specifications of the LMPT. Table 3-56 Specifications of the LMPT Board LMPT Mode LTE Transmissi on Mode Transmissio n over FE/ GE optical ports Transmissio n over FE/ GE electrical ports Number of ports 2 Port Capacity 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s Full/HalfDuplex Full-duplex
Full-duplex
Panel
Figure 3-43 shows the LMPT. Figure 3-43 LMPT
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
118
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions: l l l l Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and radio source management Controls all boards in the system Provides the system clock Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW
Indicators
There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-57 describes the indicators on the LMPT panel and their status. Table 3-57 Indicators on the LMPT panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and l Software or data is being off for 0.125s loaded to the board. l The board is not started. ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
ACT
Green
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
On for 0.125s and The OML is disconnected. off for 0.125s In every 4s, the indicator is on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s (eight times) in the first 2s and then off for 2s. The service is not available.
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have no silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-58 describes the indicators. Table 3-58 Indicators Silkscreen SFP0 and SFP1 Color Green (LINK) Status Steady on Steady off Orange (ACT) Blinking Description The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up.
120
Steady off
ETH
Orange (ACT)
Blinking
Steady off
Green (LINK)
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
Green (LINK)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color Orange (ACT)
Status Blinking
Description Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received.
Steady off
Ports
Table 3-59 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT. Table 3-59 Ports on the panel of the LMPT Silkscreen SFP0 and SFP1 Connector SFP female connector Quantity 2 Description FE/GE optical port connecting to the transmission equipment or gateway equipment Commissioning Test port Software loading FE/GE electrical port connecting to the transmission equipment or gateway equipment GPS port Used for resetting the LMPT
ETH(1) TST(2) USB(3) FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
RJ45 connector USB connector USB connector RJ45 connector
1 1 1 2
GPS RST
SMA connector -
1 1
NOTE
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
121

NOTE
3 BTS3900AL Modules
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously. SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be used simultaneously.
3.3.8 WBBP
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications
The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-60.
NOTE
The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Table 3-60 Specifications of the WBBP Board WBBPa WBBPb1 WBBPb2 WBBPb3 WBBPb4 WBBPd1 Number of Cells Supported 3 3 3 6 6 6 Number of UL CEs 128 64 128 256 384 64 192 WBBPd2 6 256 384 WBBPd3 WBBPf1 WBBPf2 WBBPf3 WBBPf4 6 6 6 6 6 256 192 256 384 512 Number of DL CEs 256 64 128 256 384 64 192 256 384 256 256 384 512 768
NOTE
There are two CE specifications for the WBBPd1 and WBBPd2 as controlled by the license and parameters.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
122
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Panel
The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-44, Figure 3-45, Figure 3-46, and Figure 3-47. Figure 3-44 Panel of the WBBPa
Figure 3-45 Panel of the WBBPb
Figure 3-46 Panel of the WBBPd
Figure 3-47 Panel of the WBBPf
NOTE
l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively. l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively. l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The WBBP performs the following functions:
3 BTS3900AL Modules
l l l l l
Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1 +1 backup mode. Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals. The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board. When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPd supports the IC of uplink data. The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between BBUs.
Indicators
There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-61 describes the indicators on the WBBP and their status. Table 3-61 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is functioning properly. l Software or data is being loaded to the board. l The board is not started. ALM Red Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
ACT
Green
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
124
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status On for 1s and off for 1s
Description The power supply for the board is insufficient.

NOTE Of all types of WBBP boards, only the WBBPf has this status.
The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP ports. Table 3-62 describes the indicators. Table 3-62 CPRI port status indicators Silkscreen CPRIx Color Red or green Status Steady green Steady red Description The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to receive or transmit signals because of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken. Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) The RF module connected to the CPRI link has a hardware fault.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
125
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Description The CPRI link is out of lock because of following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l There is mismatched data rate over CPRI ports. l VSWR alarms are generated on the RF module connected to the CPRI link when the USB(1) flash drive is used for VSWR test.
Steady off
NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-63 describes this indicator. Table 3-63 QSFP port status indicators Silkscreen HEI Color Red or green Status Steady green Description The inter-BBU transmission link is functional.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
126
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status Steady red
Description An optical module fails to receive or transmit signals because of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
The interconnection link is out of lock because of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between two interconnected BBUs. l There is mismatched data rate over QSFP ports.
Steady off
The optical module cannot be detected.
Ports
Table 3-64 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb. Table 3-64 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels Silkscreen CPRIx Connector SFP female connector Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
Table 3-65 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
127
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-65 Ports on the WBBPd panel Silkscreen CPRI0, CPRI1, CPRI2, CPRI3/ EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, CPRI5/EIH2 Connector SFP female connector Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-66. Table 3-66 Ports on the WBBPf panel Silkscreen CPRIx Connector SFP female connector Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals. Port interconnected to other baseband boards to share the baseband resources.
HEI
QSFP connector
3.3.9 LBBP
The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications
An LBBPc supports a maximum of 600 scheduled users and 1800 activated users. An LBBPd supports a maximum of 3600 activated users. When one baseband board supports multiple sectors, the number of RRC connected users is limited by the capability of the baseband board, as shown in Table 3-67. Table 3-67 Users per sector Bandwidth 1.4MHz 3MHz 5MHz 10MHz, 15MHz, and 20MHz RRC Connected Users per Cell 168 360 600 1200
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
128
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-68 lists the specifications of the LBBP that is used in the LTE FDD scenario. Table 3-68 Specifications Board Numbe r of Cells Suppor ted 3 Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration Maximum Throughput
LBBP b
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and 10 MHz
1 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 3 x 10 MHz, 2T2R channel
LBBP c
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel 3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 1 x 20 MHz, 4T4R channel
l Downlink throughput: 300 Mbit/s l Downlink throughput: 300 Mbit/s l Downlink throughput: 450 Mbit/s l Downlink throughput: 225 Mbit/s
LBBP d1
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel
LBBP d2
l Downlink throughput: 600 Mbit/s l Uplink throughput: 225 Mbit/s
Table 3-69 lists the specifications of the LBBP that is used in the LTE TDD scenario.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
129
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-69 Specifications Board Numbe r of Cells Suppor ted 3 Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration Maximum Throughput
LBBP c
5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel 3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel 1 x 20 MHz, 8T8R channel
l Downlink throughput: 300 Mbit/s l Downlink throughput: 300 Mbit/s l Downlink throughput: 450 Mbit/s l Downlink throughput: 225 Mbit/s
LBBP d1
3 x 20 MHz, 2T2R channel
LBBP d2
l Downlink throughput: 600 Mbit/s l Uplink throughput: 225 Mbit/s
NOTE
l The Antenna Configuration column lists the maximum specifications supported by various types of LBBP. For example, the maximum specification supported by the LBBPc is 3 x 10 MHz, 4T4R channel, then the configurations of 3 x 1.4 MHz, 4T4R channel, of 3 x 3 MHz, 4T4R channel, and of 3 x 5 MHz, 4T4R channel are supported by the LBBPc. l The cells carried on the same baseband processing board must use the same antenna configuration as well as a bandwidth lower than the maximum bandwidth supported by each cell in this antenna configuration. For example, if an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells carried on the LBBPc can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10 MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.
Panel
The LBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-48, Figure 3-49, and Figure 3-50. Figure 3-48 LBBPb panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
130
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-49 LBBPc panel
Figure 3-50 LBBPd panel
NOTE
l The LBBPb applies only to the LTE FDD scenario, and the LBBPc and LBBPd apply to both the LTE FDD and LTE TDD scenarios. l The LBBPd1, and LBBPd2 have silkscreens LBBPd1, and LBBPd2 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The LBBP performs the following functions: l l l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals. Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules. Achieves BBU baseband resource sharing.
Indicators
On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-70. Table 3-70 Indicators on the LBBP panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is functioning properly. l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen ALM
Color Red
Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s
Description An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board is not activated. l The board does not provide any services.
ACT
Green
The power supply for the board is insufficient.

NOTE Of all types of LBBP boards, only the LBBPd has this status.
As listed in Table 3-71, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports. Table 3-71 SFP link status indicators Silkscreen CPRIx Color Red or green Status Steady green Steady red Description The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to receive or transmit signals because of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken. Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) The RF module connected to the CPRI link has a hardware fault.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
132
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Description The CPRI link is out of lock because of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l The data rates of the CPRI ports do not match each other.
Steady off
The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP) link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-72 describes the indicator. Table 3-72 QSFP link status indicator Silkscreen HEI Color Red or green Status Steady green Description The inter-BBU transmission link is functional. An optical module fails to receive or transmit signals because of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
Steady red
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
133
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Description The interconnection link is out of lock because of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between two interconnected BBUs. l The data rates of the QSFP ports do not match each other.
Steady off
Ports
Table 3-73 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel. Table 3-73 LBBP ports Silkscreen CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female connector Quantity 6 Description Connected to the RF modules for transmitting service data, clock signals, and synchronization information.
Table 3-74 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel. Table 3-74 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel Silkscreen HEI Connector QSFP connector Quantity 1 Description Reserved
3.3.10 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Panel
The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52. Figure 3-51 FAN
Figure 3-52 FANc
NOTE
There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.
Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions: l l l
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Controls the fan speed. Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control processing unit. Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
l l
Dissipates heat. The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.
Indicator
There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status of the fans. Table 3-75 describes the indicator. Table 3-75 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit Silkscreen STATE Color Red or green Status Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s) Steady off Description The module is not registered, and no alarm is reported. The module is working. The module is reporting alarms. There is no power supply.
3.3.11 UPEU
The universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.
Panel
The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a (UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power and environment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unit type d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-53, Figure 3-54, Figure 3-55, and Figure 3-56 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, and UPEUd, respectively.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
136
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-53 UPEUa panel
(1) BBU power switch
(2) 7W2 connector
Figure 3-54 UPEUb panel
(2) 7W2 connector
Figure 3-55 UPEUc panel
(2) 3V3 connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
137
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-56 UPEUd panel
(2) 3V3 connector
NOTE
The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them, respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types. The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.
Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions: l l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating voltage of the boards. Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open Collector (OC) signals.
Table 3-76 describes the specifications. Table 3-76 Specifications Board UPEUa UPEUc Output Power The output power of a UPEUa is 300 W. The output power of a UPEUc is 360 W, and the output power of two UPEUc boards is 650 W. The output power of a UPEUd is 650 W. Backup Mode 1+1 backup 1+1 backup
UPEUd
1+1 backup
NOTE
After the UPEUa is replaced by the UPEUc, the UPEU power consumption data monitored by the M2000 will change. The power consumption data does not only depend on the output power but also on the data collection method. The UPEUc and UPEUa use different methods for collecting power consumption data. Therefore, the decrease in the power consumption shown in the M2000 after the UPEUa is replaced by the UPEUc does not necessarily reflect the actual decrease of power consumption.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
138
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-77 describes the indicator. Table 3-77 Indicator on the UPEU panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off Description The board is functional. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Port
The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Boolean signal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-57 shows the slots in the BBU. Figure 3-57 Slots in the BBU
Table 3-78 describes the ports on the UPEU panel. Table 3-78 Description on the ports Slot Slot 19 Silkscree n +24 V or -48 V EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 Connecto r 3V3 or 7W2 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Quantity 1 Description Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power
1 1 1
Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 input 0
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
139
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Slot
Silkscree n MON1
Connecto r RJ45 connector 3V3 or 7W2 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector
Quantity 1 1
Description Port for RS485 input 1 Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power
Slot 18
+24 V or -48 V EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1
1 1 1 1
Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 input 0 Port for RS485 input 1
3.3.12 UEIU
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Panel
Figure 3-58 shows the panel of the UEIU. Figure 3-58 Panel of the UEIU
Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions: l l Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal. Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or OC signals.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Port
The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one path of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Boolean signals. Table 3-79 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU. Table 3-79 Ports on the panel of the UEIU Slot Slot 18 Silkscre en EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1 Connect or RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Quanti ty 1 1 1 1 Description Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 input 0 Port for RS485 input 1
3.3.13 UTRP
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the BBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.
Specifications
Table 3-80 describes the specifications of the UTRP. Table 3-80 Specifications of the UTRP Board Subboard/ Board Type UEOC Supporte d Mode Transmis sion Mode Transmiss ion over FE/GE optical ports ATM over E1/T1 Number of ports Port Capacity Full/ HalfDuplex Fullduplex
UTRP2
UMTS
10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/ s, and 1000 Mbit/ s Eight channels
UTRP3
UAEC
UMTS
Fullduplex
141
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Board
Subboard/ Board Type UIEC Without a sub-board UUAS UQEC
Supporte d Mode
Transmis sion Mode IP over E1/ T1 TDM over E1/T1 STM-1/ OC-3 Transmiss ion over FE/GE electrical ports Transmiss ion over FE/GE electrical ports Transmiss ion over FE/GE optical ports
Number of ports
Port Capacity
Full/ HalfDuplex Fullduplex Fullduplex Fullduplex Fullduplex
UTRP4 UTRPb4 UTRP6 UTRP9
UMTS GSM UMTS UMTS
2 2 1 4
Eight channels Eight channels One channel 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/ s, and 1000 Mbit/ s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/ s, and 1000 Mbit/ s 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
UTRPc
Without a sub-board
GSM UMTS LTE
Fullduplex
Fullduplex
Panel
Figure 3-59 shows the panel of the UTRP2. Figure 3-59 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)
Figure 3-60 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-60 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
142
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-61 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode. Figure 3-61 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Figure 3-62 shows the panel of the UTRP6. Figure 3-62 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)
Figure 3-63 shows the panel of the UTRP9. Figure 3-63 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
Figure 3-64 shows the panel of the UTRPc. Figure 3-64 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
Functions
The UTRP performs the following functions: l Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM, TDM, and IP transmission.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
l l
Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment. Supports cold backup.
Restriction
The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.
Indicators
Table 3-81 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel. Table 3-81 Indicators on the UTRP panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started. ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board.
Steady off
ACT
Green
Steady on
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
144
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status Steady off
Description l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator on other boards, as listed in Table 3-82. Table 3-82 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode Silkscreen ACT Color Green Status Steady on Description l Before the configuration takes effect, none or both of the two E1 ports in GSM mode are functional. l The configuration has taken effect. On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Before the configuration takes effect, only one E1 port in GSM mode is functional.
Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-83. Table 3-83 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc Silkscreen LINK Color Green Status Steady on Steady off Description The link is connected properly. The link is not connected properly.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
145
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen ACT
Color Orange
Status Blinking
Description Data is being transmitted or received on the link. No data is being transmitted or received on the link.
Steady off
There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table 3-84. Table 3-84 Status of indicators on the UTRPc Silkscreen R0 Color Red or green Status Steady off Description The board is not working in GSM mode. The board is working in GSM mode. Reserved The board is not working in UMTS mode. The board is working in UMTS mode. Reserved The board is not working in LTE mode. The board is working in LTE mode. Reserved
Steady green Steady red R1 Red or green Steady off
Steady green Steady red R2 Red or green Steady off
Steady green Steady red
NOTE
If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.
Ports
Table 3-85 describes the ports on the UTRP2.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
146
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-85 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports) Silkscreen FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 Port Type FE/GE optical port Quantity 2 Connector SFP female connector
The UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-86. Table 3-86 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports) Silkscreen E1/T1 Port Type E1/T1 port Quantity 2 Connector DB26 female connector
Table 3-87 lists the ports on the UTRP6. Table 3-87 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel) Silkscreen STM-1/OC-3 Port Type STM-1/OC-3 Quantity 1 Connector SFP female connector
Table 3-88 lists the ports on the UTRP9. Table 3-88 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports) Silkscreen FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 Port Type FE/GE electrical port Quantity 4 Connector RJ45 connector
Table 3-89 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc. Table 3-89 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports) Silkscreen FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 FE/GE2 to FE/GE5 Port Type FE/GE optical port FE/GE electrical port Quantity 2 4 Connector SFP female connector RJ45 connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
147
3 BTS3900AL Modules
DIP Switch
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9. There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are used to set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the resistance of the E1 cable. Figure 3-65 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-66 shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4. Figure 3-65 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4
Figure 3-66 DIP switches on the UTRPb4
Table 3-90, Table 3-91, and Table 3-92 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP. Table 3-90 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW1 DIP Setting 1 OFF ON
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Description 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Imbalanced

148
3 BTS3900AL Modules
DIP Switch
DIP Setting 1 2 3 Others 4
Description
Unavailable
Table 3-91 Settings of SW2 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW2 DIP Setting 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON Others 4 OFF ON Balanced Imbalanced Unavailable Description
CAUTION
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2 corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.
Table 3-92 Settings of SW3 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW3 DIP Setting 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 ON OFF 4 ON OFF T1 The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm. The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm. Unavailable Description
ON
ON
ON
ON
Others
3.3.14 USCU
This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
149
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Specifications
The USCU falls into five types, as shown in Table 3-93. Table 3-93 Specifications of the USCU Board USCUb11 USCUb12 Supported Mode LTE GSM UMTS USCUb14 GSM UMTS USCUb22 GSM UMTS USCUb21 GSM UMTS LTE K161 dual-satellite card Naviors dual-satellite card UBLOX single-satellite card Supported Satellite Card N/A RT single-satellite card
Panel
There are five types of USCU: USCUb11, USCUb12, USCUb14, USCUb22, and USCUb21, as shown in Figure 3-67 and Figure 3-68. The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have the same exterior. The USCUb22 and the USCUb21 have the same exterior. Figure 3-67 USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 panel
Figure 3-68 USCUb22 and USCUb21 panel
(1) GPS port
(2) RGPS port
(3) TOD port
(4) M-1PPS port
(5) BITS port
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
150
3 BTS3900AL Modules
NOTE
l The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have silkscreens USCUb11 , USCUb12 and USCUb14 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively. l The USCUb22 and USCUb21 have silkscreens USCUb22 and USCUb21 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The USCU has the following functions: l l l l l The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals. The USCUb12 contains an RT satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals. The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals. The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which must be purchased locally and installed onsite. The USCUb21 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a K161 satellite card, which must be purchased locally and installed onsite.
Indicators
Table 3-94 and Table 3-95 describe the indicators on the USCU. Table 3-94 Indicators on the USCU Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is functioning properly. l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started. ALM Red Steady on An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced. The board is running properly.
151
Steady off
Steady off
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Status On for 1s and off for 1s
Description An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
ACT
Green
Table 3-95 Indicators for the TOD ports Color Green (on the left) Status The green indicator is steady on and the orange indicator is steady off. The orange indicator is steady on and the green indicator is steady off. Description The TOD port is configured as an input port. The TOD port is configured as an output port.
Orange (on the right)
Ports
Table 3-96 describes the ports on the USCU. Table 3-96 Ports on the USCU Silkscreen GPS Connector SMA connector Description The GPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21, USCUb14 and USCUb22 receive GPS signals. The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved and cannot receive GPS signals.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
152
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen RGPS port
Connector PCB welded wiring terminal
Description The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPS signals. The RGPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21, USCUb14 and USCUb22 are reserved and cannot receive RGPS signals.
TOD0 port TOD1 port BITS port
RJ45 connector RJ45 connector SMA connector
This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals. This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, and receives TOD signals from the M1000. This port receives BITS clock signals, supports adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock reference source. This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.
M-1PPS port
SMA connector
3.3.15 UBRI
The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Panel
Figure 3-69 shows the panel of the UBRI. Figure 3-69 UBRI panel
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions: l l Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports. Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Indicators
Table 3-97 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
153
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-97 Indicators on the UBRI panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s ALM Red Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. Software is being loaded to the board. An alarm is generated on the board. The board is running properly. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
ACT
Green
The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are above the SFP ports. Table 3-98 describes the indicators. Table 3-98 CPRI port status indicators Silkscreen CPRIx Color Red or green Status Steady green Steady red Description The CPRI link is functioning properly. An optical module fails to receive signals because of the following reasons: l The optical module is faulty. l The fiber optic cable is broken.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen
Color
Description The CPRI link is out of lock because of the following reasons: l There is no mutual lock between dualmode clock sources. l The data rates of the CPRI ports do not match each other.
Steady off
Ports
Table 3-99 describes the ports on the UBRI panel. Table 3-99 Ports on the UBRI panel Silkscreen CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female connector Quantity 6 Description Connecting the BBU and the RF module
3.3.16 UCIU
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.
Panel
Figure 3-70 shows the UCIU panel. Figure 3-70 UCIU panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
155
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Functions
The UCIU performs the following functions: l l l l Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it is shared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode. Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another. Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station. Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.
Indicators
A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-100 describes the indicators on the UCIU panel. Table 3-100 Indicators on the UCIU panel Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. l The board is being loaded or configured. l The board is not started. ALM Red Steady on Steady off On for 1s and off for 1s An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. There is no fault. An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. The board serves as an active board. l The board does not serve as an active board. l The board has not been activated. l The board is not providing any services.
ACT
Green
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen M0 to M4 and S0
Color Red or green
Status Steady green Steady red
Description The inter-BBU transmission link is normal. The optical module fails to transmit or receive signals, or the fiber optic cable is faulty. Cables are connected in an incorrect manner. For example: l In the UCIU+UMPT scenario, the S0 port on the UCIU is connected to the CI port on the UMPT. Indicators for the S0 and CI ports are blinking. l The ports are connected in ring topology. Indicators for all incorrectly connected ports are blinking.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Steady off
Ports
Table 3-101 describes UCIU ports. Table 3-101 UCIU ports Silkscreen M0 to M4 S0 GCK Connector SFP female connector SFP female connector DB15 connector Description Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to the secondary inter-BBU ports. Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to the primary inter-BBU port. Provides reference clocks when the base station and a 3012 series base station are combined.
3.4 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals

The UELP or UFLP can be optionally configured to provide surge protection for transmission signals.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
157
3 BTS3900AL Modules
3.4.1 Configuration Rules for Surge Protection Boards for Transmission Signals
This section describes the configuration rules for surge protection boards for transmission signals.
Slots of Surge Protection Boards for Transmission Signals

Figure 3-71 shows the slots of surge protection boards for transmission signals. Figure 3-71 Slots of surge protection boards for transmission signals
Board Configuration
The UELP or UFLP can be installed on the upper right of the cabinet to provide surge protection for transmission signals. Table 3-102 describes the board configuration rules.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
158
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-102 Board configuration rules Board UELP Optional or Mandatory Optional Maximum Quantity 4 Installation Slot Slot 0 to slot 3 Remarks The UELP is installed, in descending order of priority, in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3. If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
UFLP
Optional
Slot3
3.4.2 UELP
Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths of E1/T1 signals.
Panel
Figure 3-72 shows the panel of the UELP. Figure 3-72 UELP panel
Ports
Table 3-103 lists the ports on the UELP. Table 3-103 Ports on the UELP Silkscreen INSIDE Connector DB25 female connector Description Connecting to a transmission board of the base station
159
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Silkscreen OUTSIDE
Connector DB26 female connector
Description Connecting to an external transmission device
DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 3-73 shows the DIP switch on the UELP. Figure 3-73 DIP switch on the UELP
Table 3-104 describes the DIP switch on the UELP. Table 3-104 DIP switch on the UELP DIP Switch S1 DIP Status 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF Not grounded Grounded Description
Other status
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
160

NOTE
3 BTS3900AL Modules
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
3.4.3 UFLP
Each universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE signals. Each universal FE lightning protection unit type B (UFLPB) provides protection for two channels of FE/GE signals.
NOTE
The UFLPB applies only to the LTE mode.
Panel
Figure 3-74 shows the UELP panel. Figure 3-74 UELP panel
Figure 3-75 shows the UFLPB panel. Figure 3-75 UFLPB panel
Port
Table 3-105 describes UFLP ports. Table 3-105 UFLP ports Port Location INSIDE side Silkscreen FE0 and FE1 Connector RJ45 connector Description Connecting to a transmission board of the base station Connecting to an external transmission device
OUTSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
161
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Table 3-106 describes UFLPB ports. Table 3-106 UFLPB ports Port Location INSIDE side Silkscreen on the Panel FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 Connector RJ45 connector Description Connecting to a transmission board of the base station Connecting to an external transmission device
OUTSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
3.5 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is optional and is configured with two USLP2s.
3.5.1 SLPU
The SLPU, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high. Figure 3-76 shows the SLPU. Figure 3-76 SLPU
3.5.2 Configuration Rules for SLPU Boards

This section describes the configuration rules for SPLU boards.
Slots of the SLPU

Figure 3-77 shows the slots of the SLPU. Figure 3-77 Slots of the SLPU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
162
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Configuration Rules for the SLPU

When there are not more than 16 dry contacts in the SLPU, the SLPU is used as a monitoring signal protection unit, which is an optional component. In this case, the SLPU is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space at the bottom of the BBU. Table 3-107 lists the configuration rules for the SLPU. Table 3-107 Configuration rules for the SLPU Board USLP2 Optional or Mandatory Optional Maximum Quantity 2 Slot Slot 2 and slot 3
3.5.3 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel
Figure 3-78 shows the panel of a USLP2. Figure 3-78 Panel of a USLP2
Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-108 lists the ports on the panel of the USLP2. Table 3-108 Ports on the panel of the USLP2 Silkscreen on the Panel IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3 OUT0 and OUT1 Port Type 4-pin Quantity 4 Description Input ports, which connect to customized alarm devices Output ports, which connect to an EXTALM port of the UPEU or UEIU in the cabinet
RJ45 connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
163
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Figure 3-79 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Figure 3-79 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0
7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
OUT1
7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2 1
IN0
2 3 4 1
IN1
2 3 4 1
IN2
2 3 4 1
IN3
2 3 4
Table 3-109 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-109 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 Input Silkscreen on the Panel INO Pin IN0.1 IN0.2 IN0.3 IN0.4 IN1 IN1.1 IN1.2 IN1.3 IN1.4 IN2 IN2.1 IN2.2 IN2.3 IN2.4 IN3 IN3.1 IN3.2 IN3.3 IN3.4
Issue 2012-08-05 (04) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Output Silkscreen on the Panel OUT1 Pin OUT1.1 OUT1.2 OUT1.4 OUT1.5 OUT1.3 OUT1.6 OUT1.7 OUT1.8 OUT0 OUT0.1 OUT0.2 OUT0.4 OUT0.5 OUT0.3 OUT0.6 OUT0.7 OUT0.8
164
3 BTS3900AL Modules
For details about the application of the USLP2, see Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU.
3.6 GPS Surge Protector

The Global Positioning System (GPS) surge protector protects the satellite receiver from lightning.
Exterior
Figure 3-80 shows the GPS surge protector. Figure 3-80 GPS surge protector
Ports
Table 3-110 describes the ports on the GPS surge protector. Table 3-110 Ports on the GPS surge protector SN (1) (2) (3) Silkscreen Surge Protect Connector N-type female connector Ground terminal N-type male connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
165
3 BTS3900AL Modules
3.7 DDF
The digital distribution frame (DDF) is optional and can be installed in the customer equipment space in the BTS3900AL or TMC11H(Ver.C).
Structure
Figure 3-81 shows the structure of the DDF. Figure 3-81 Structure of the DDF
(1) Alarm module (2) Digital distribution module
(3) Digital distribution module
(4) Baffle plate (5) Wall-mounting pieces
Function
The DDF performs the following functions: l l Transfers signals through the trunk cables between the communication devices and the transmission devices. Transfers signals through the alarm cables between the communication devices and the external alarm devices.
Feature
The DDF has the following features: l l l
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Provides wall-mounting pieces and supporting the installations in a 19-inch cabinet and on a wall. Transfers 16 alarm signals and eight E1s with each E1 grounded. Supports wire punching from the front.
3 BTS3900AL Modules
Technical Specification
Table 3-111 describes the technical specifications of the DDF. Table 3-111 Technical specifications of the DDF Item Dimensions (height x width x depth) Weight Working rate Characteristic impedance Inter-wire-bundle cross noise prevention class Insertion loss Return loss Specification 44 mm x 483 mm x 59 mm 1 kg 2 Mbit/s 120 ohms 60 dB 0.4 dB 18 dB
3.8 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms. The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following items: l l l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
167
4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900AL Cabinet
Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900AL Cabinet
About This Chapter

This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, base station power distribution scheme, and components in the power system of the BTS3900AL cabinet. 4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900AL. The recommended configurations are based on a fully configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customer equipment inside the cabinet are also included. 4.2 Power Distribution for BTS3900AL Cabinets This section describes power distribution schemes for BTS3900AL cabinets. 4.3 PDU05A The power distribution unit-05A (PDU05A) distributes AC power for the power supply unit (PSU), service outlet unit (SOU), and heater assembly unit (HAU). 4.4 PDU03D A power distribution unit-03D (PDU03D) provides -48 V DC power output ports for power distribution to a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. 4.5 ETP The embedded telecommunication power (ETP) system converts AC power into DC power and supplies power to devices inside the cabinet. 4.6 Junction Box A junction box supports one AC input and four AC outputs. It supplies AC power input to the service outlet unit (SOU) and heater assembly units (HAUs). 4.7 DCDU-11C The direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) provides DC power input for each component in the cabinet. 4.8 DCDU-11B
The direct current distribution unit type B (DCDU-11B) provides DC power input for RRUs installed outside a cabinet. 4.9 DCDU-03B The direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides DC power input for RRUs installed outside a cabinet. 4.10 DCDU-11A The direct current distribution unit-11A (DCDU-11A) provides DC power input for FAUs and RFUs.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
169
4.1 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables

This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900AL. The recommended configurations are based on a fully configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customer equipment inside the cabinet are also included. Table 4-1 lists the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900AL. Table 4-1 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for AC input Power Input Type Product Configuration Requirement for Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment 1 x 63 A/3 P(1) (recommended) 1 x 40 A/3 P 1 x 63 A/3 P 1 x 125 A/1 P (recommended) 1 x 125 A/1 P 1 x 100 A/1 P 1 x 80 A/1 P 1 x 125 A/1 P 1 x 125 A/1 P 1 x 100 A/1 P 1 x 125 A/2 P (recommended) 1 x 125 A/2 P 1 x 100 A/2 P 35 mm2 (0.039 in.2) 15 m (39.37 ft.) 35 mm2 (0.039 in.2) 15 m (39.37 ft.) Crosssectional Area of an Input Power Cable 10 mm2 (0.015 in.2) Length of an Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
7 PSUs + 1 SOU 4 to 6 PSUs + 1 SOU 4 to 7 PSUs + 1 HAU + 1 SOU
15 m (39.37 ft.)
200 V AC single-phase
7 PSUs + 1 SOU 6 PSUs + 1 SOU 5 PSUs + 1 SOU 4 PSUs + 1 SOU 6 PSUs + 1 HAU + 1 SOU 5 PSUs + 1 HAU + 1 SOU 4 PSUs + 1 HAU + 1 SOU
110 V AC dual-livewire
7 PSUs + 1 SOU 6 PSUs + 1 SOU 5 PSUs + 1 SOU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
170
Power Input Type
Product Configuration
Requirement for Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment 1 x 80 A/2 P
Crosssectional Area of an Input Power Cable
Length of an Input Power Cable
4 PSUs + 1 SOU
NOTE
(1) P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
4.2 Power Distribution for BTS3900AL Cabinets

This section describes power distribution schemes for BTS3900AL cabinets.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL AC Cabinet

If a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is supplied with 220 V AC or 110 V AC power, the input AC power is converted into DC power by the PDU05A and ETP in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The DC power is then distributed by the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, and DCDU-11A to all boards in the cabinet. After going through the PDU05A, the AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs: l l One AC power output is connected to the junction box on the right of the cabinet door, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the HAU. Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs into DC power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, DCDU-11A, and storage batteries. One AC power output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 4-1 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC threephase input power and configured with the DCDU-11B. Figure 4-2 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase input power and configured with the DCDU-03B. Table 4-2 lists the specifications of circuit breakers. The power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power is the same as the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase input power. The difference between the power distribution schemes for the three types of power inputs resides in the configuration of short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 4-3.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
171
Figure 4-1 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase input power (DCDU-11B)
Figure 4-2 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase input power (DCDU-03B)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
172
Table 4-2 Specifications of circuit breakers Power Distribution Device PDU05A Specifications of an AC Output Circuit Breaker l PSU1/5: 1 x 40 A l PSU2/6: 1 x 40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1 x 63 A l Heater: 1 x 25 A l SOU: 1 x 10 A ETP l DCDU-11C: 1 x 100 A l BTS3900AL DC cabinet: 1 x 100 A l TMC11H (Ver.C): 1 x 100 A l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B: 2 x 200 A l DCDU-11A: 1 x 200 A l Storage battery: 1 x 400 A DCDU-11C l CCU: 1 x 6 A l Reserved: 1 x 6 A l TM(1): 2 x 12 A l IBBS: 1 x 25 A l BBU: 4 x 25 A l HEX: 1 x 25 A DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B 0# DCDU-11B l RRU: 6 x 25 A l Reserved: 4 x 25 A DCDU-03B l RRU: 6 x 20 A l Reserved: 3 x 12 A DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B 1# DCDU-11B l RRU: 6 x 25 A l Reserved: 4 x 25 A DCDU-03B l RRU: 6 x 20 A l Reserved: 3 x 12 A DCDU-11A l RFU: 9 x 25 A l FAU: 1 x 25 A Specifications of a DC Output Circuit Breaker -
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
173

NOTE
(1) TM: transmission device
Figure 4-3 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL DC Cabinet

A BTS3900AL DC cabinet is supplied with external DC power, which is distributed by the PDU03D to the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11A, and DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B. Figure 4-4 shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet configured with DCDU-11B. Figure 4-5 shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet configured with DCDU-03B. Table 4-3 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Figure 4-4 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet (DCDU-11B)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
174
Figure 4-5 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet (DCDU-03B)
Table 4-3 Specifications of circuit breakers Power Distribution Device DCDU-11C Specifications of a DC Output Circuit Breaker l CCU: 1 x 6 A l Reserved: 1 x 6 A l TM: 2 x 12 A l IBBS: 1 x 25 A l BBU: 4 x 25 A l HEX: 1 x 25 A DCDU-11A l RFU: 9 x 25 A l FAU: 1 x 25 A DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B 0# DCDU-11B l RRU: 6 x 25 A l Reserved: 4 x 25 A DCDU-03B l RRU: 6 x 20 A l Reserved: 3 x 12 A
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
175
Power Distribution Device DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B 1#
Specifications of a DC Output Circuit Breaker DCDU-11B l RRU: 6 x 25 A l Reserved: 4 x 25 A DCDU-03B l RRU: 6 x 20 A l Reserved: 3 x 12 A
4.3 PDU05A
The power distribution unit-05A (PDU05A) distributes AC power for the power supply unit (PSU), service outlet unit (SOU), and heater assembly unit (HAU).
Functions
The PDU05A performs the following functions: l l l Provides five AC outputs. Three outputs are provided to PSUs, one output is provided to HAUs after transferred by the junction box, and one output is provided to the SOU. Provides cord end terminals, through which the 110 V AC dual-live-wire, 220 V AC singlephase, and 220 V AC three-phase power can be supplied to the PDU05A. Provides an SOU which is optional. The SOU transfers AC power to customer equipment.
Exterior
Figure 4-6 shows the exterior of the PDU05A, and Table 4-4 describes the PDU05A. Figure 4-6 Exterior of the PDU05A
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
176
Table 4-4 PDU05A No. (1) Item SOU Silkscr een SERVI CE OUTLE T 10A MAX HEATE R PSU1/5 PSU2/6 PSU3/4/ 7 (5) (6) AC surge protector AC input terminals L1 L2 L3 N PE Description The service outlet unit is an optional AC device. It complies with the European standard.
(2) (3)
Decouplin g coil HAU circuit breaker PSU circuit breaker
The HAU circuit breaker controls the power supply to the HAU. The PSU circuit breaker controls the power supply to the PSUs. The PSU circuit breakers are bipolar circuit breakers. The rated current of the PSU1/5 and PSU2/6 is 40 A, and the rated current of the PSU3/4/7 is 63 A. The AC surge protector reports AC input surge protection alarms. The AC input terminals are used for 110 V AC dual-livewire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power inputs.
(4)
Specifications of the SOU

Table 4-5 lists the specifications of the SOU. Table 4-5 Specifications Parameter Rated current Rated voltage Operating temperature Protection class Specifications 5A 110 V AC or 220 V AC -40C to +55C (-40F to +131F) IP20
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
177
4.4 PDU03D
A power distribution unit-03D (PDU03D) provides -48 V DC power output ports for power distribution to a BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
Functions
l l A PDU03D has three groups of transfer terminals, which can provide single-output power supply and dual-output power supply simultaneously. Based on the load configuration, a PDU03D can receive external DC power of one 100 A input (INPUT2) and two 160 A inputs (INPUT0 and INPUT1).
Exterior
Figure 4-7 shows the PDU03D exterior, and Table 4-6 describes it. Figure 4-7 PDU03D exterior
Table 4-6 PDU03D exterior No. (1) Item DC input terminal Label INPUT0 RTN(+)_0 NEG(-)_0 INPUT1 RTN(+)_1 NEG(-)_1 INPUT2 RTN(+)_2 Description Positive power input wiring terminal Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal
178
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
No.
Item
Label NEG(-)_2
Description Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal Negative power input wiring terminal
(2)
DC output terminal
OUTPUT0
RTN(+)_0 NEG(-)_0
OUTPUT1
RTN(+)_1 NEG(-)_1
OUTPUT1
RTN(+)_2 NEG(-)_2
4.5 ETP
The embedded telecommunication power (ETP) system converts AC power into DC power and supplies power to devices inside the cabinet.
4.5.1 ETP Subrack

The embedded telecommunication power (ETP) subrack distributes AC input power and DC output power, and provides the communication interface between the PSUs and the PMU.
Functions
An ETP subrack houses only one PMU and seven PSUs and provides the following DC outputs: l l l Three DC power outputs of 100 A. One is supplied to the DCDU-11C, and the rest are reserved for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet and the TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet. Three DC power outputs of 200 A. One is supplied to the DCDU-11A, and the rest are supplied to the DCDU-11B or DCDU-03B. One DC power output of 400 A, which is supplied to the built-in storage battery group or the IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
Exterior
Figure 4-8 shows the ETP subrack.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
179
Figure 4-8 ETP subrack
(1) DCDU-11C power supply terminal (5) DCDU-11C circuit breaker (9) DCDU-11A circuit breaker (13) PSU slot
(2) BTS3900AL DC cabinet power supply terminal (6) BTS3900AL DC cabinet circuit breaker (10) DCDU-11B 1# or DCDU-03B 1# circuit breaker (14) PMU slot
(3) TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet power supply terminal (7) TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet circuit breaker
(4) AC input wiring terminal (8) DCDU-11B 0# or DCDU-03B 0# circuit breaker
(11) Built-in storage (12) DC output terminal battery/IBBS700D/ IBBS700T circuit breaker -
Table 4-7 shows the configurations of the ETP subrack. Table 4-7 Configurations of the ETP subrack Component ETP subrack PSU Type ETP48400A R4850G2 Description One must be configured. A minimum of four PSUs must be configured. The PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots from slot 1 to slot 7. One PMU must be installed in slot 0.
PMU
PMU 10A
4.5.2 PMU
The power monitoring unit (PMU) manages the power system and batteries, monitors power, and reports alarms.
Functions
The PMU implements the following functions:
l l l
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port. Manages the power system, and charges and discharges batteries. Checks and reports door status alarms and standby Boolean detection results, and reports the ambient temperature, ambient humidity, battery temperature, and standby analog values. Monitors power distribution and reports alarms including dry contact alarms. Communicates with the storage battery cabinet using an RS485 port.
l l
Exterior
Figure 4-9 shows the PMU exterior. Figure 4-9 PMU exterior
NOTE
A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of the PMU.
Ports and Indicators

Figure 4-10 shows ports and indicators on the front panel of the PMU. Figure 4-10 Ports and indicators on the front panel of the PMU
(1) PMU status indicator (4) COM_OUT port
(2) FE port (5) COM_485 port
(3) COM_IN port (6) COM port
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
181
Table 4-8 describes the ports on the front panel of the PMU. Table 4-8 Ports on the front panel of the PMU Port FE COM_IN COM_OUT COM_485 COM Description Reserved. Connects to the BBU or upper-level device and reports alarms to the BBU. Connects to lower-level devices such as the EMUA and collects alarms from the lower-level devices. Reserved. Reserved.
Table 4-9 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PMU. Table 4-9 Indicators on the front panel of the PMU Indicat or RUN Color Green Status Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description The PMU is performing startup, self-check, loading, and activation. The PMU is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly. (This status does not necessarily mean that the main control board has been configured with the PMU.) The PMU is properly functioning, but fails to communicate with the upper-level device (if the PMU does not communicate with the upper-level device for 1 minute, the communication fails). The PMU is faulty or there is no DC input. A fault occurs in the PMU and the PMU needs to be replaced. No alarm is generated. An alarm is generated. Diagnose the fault to decide whether to replace the PMU.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Steady off ALM Red Steady on Steady off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
NOTE
3s to 5s after the PMU is powered on, the ALM and RUN indicators are on for about 3s.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
182
DIP Switch
There is a dual in-line package switch (DIP switch) on the left panel of the PMU. The DIP switch has eight bits among which the four least significant bits (1, 2, 3, and 4) define the monitoring address of the PMU, and the four most significant bits (5, 6, 7, and 8) are reserved for future use. The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. The monitoring address of the PMU is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in Figure 4-11. Figure 4-11 DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU
4.5.3 PSU
The power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
Functions
The PSU implements the following functions: l l l Converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. The power monitoring unit (PMU) adjusts the output voltage. Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overheat. Dissipates heat using built-in fans.
Exterior
Figure 4-12 shows the PSU exterior.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
183
Figure 4-12 PSU exterior
NOTE
A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of the PSU.
Indicators
Figure 4-13 shows the indicators on the front panel of the PSU. Figure 4-13 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU
(1) Power indicator
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
Table 4-10 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PSU. Table 4-10 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU Indicat or Power indicato r Protecti on indicato r Color Green Status Steady on Steady off Yellow Steady off Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Description The PSU is functioning properly. The PSU is experiencing a mains supply fault, or the PSU is faulty. The PSU is functioning properly. An alarm triggered by an external factor is generated. The communication between the PSU and the PMU is interrupted.
184
Indicat or Fault indicato r
Color Red
Status Steady off Steady on
Description The PSU is functioning properly. The PSU is faulty or shut down in case of an emergency. Diagnose the fault to determine whether to replace the PSU.
4.6 Junction Box

A junction box supports one AC input and four AC outputs. It supplies AC power input to the service outlet unit (SOU) and heater assembly units (HAUs).
Exterior
The junction box is installed on the right of the BTS3900AL cabinet door. Figure 4-14 shows the exterior of a junction box. Figure 4-14 Exterior of a junction box
Interior
Figure 4-15 shows the interior of a junction box.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
185
Figure 4-15 Interior of a junction box
(1) Four AC output L wiring terminals (4) Cable hole
(2) Four AC output N wiring terminals (5) AC input N wiring terminal
(3) Four AC output PE wiring terminals (6) AC input L wiring terminal
4.7 DCDU-11C
The direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) provides DC power input for each component in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-16 shows the DCDU-11C. Figure 4-16 DCDU-11C
Functions
The DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC power outputs. Table 4-11 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11C.
Table 4-11 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11C DC Output Terminal LOAD0 LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4 LOAD5 LOAD6 LOAD7 LOAD8 LOAD9 Power-Consuming Device CCU Reserved Reserved Reserved IBBS700D or IBBS700T BBU0 BBU0 BBU1 BBU1 CMUF Specification of the Circuit Breaker 6A 6A 12 A 12 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A Circuit Breaker
SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 SW9
Ports
Figure 4-17 shows the ports on the DCDU-11C panel. Figure 4-17 Ports on the DCDU-11C panel
Table 4-12 describes the terminals and switches on the DCDU-11C panel.
Table 4-12 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-11C panel N o. (1) Termina l DC input terminal Label NEG(-) RTN(+) Matched Terminal and Cable Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 25 mm2. Description Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal
(2)
Circuit breaker
SW0 to SW9
The circuit breakers SW0 to SW9 control the ports LOAD0 to LOAD9, respectively, to control power supplies to the BBU, CMUF, CCU, and transmission devices.
(3)
DC output terminal
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-18 shows For the specifications of the DC the tool-less female output, see Table 4-11. connector (pressfit type) that fits LOAD0 to LOAD9. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 4 mm2.
Figure 4-18 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
4.8 DCDU-11B
The direct current distribution unit type B (DCDU-11B) provides DC power input for RRUs installed outside a cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-19 shows the DCDU-11B.
Figure 4-19 DCDU-11B
Functions
The DCDU-11B provides ten -48 V DC power outputs. Table 4-13 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B. Table 4-13 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B DC Output Terminal LOAD0 to LOAD5 LOAD6 to LOAD9 Power-Consuming Device RRU Reserved Specification of the Circuit Breaker 25 A 25 A Circuit Breaker
SW0 to SW5 SW6 to SW9
Ports
Figure 4-20 shows the ports on the DCDU-11B panel. Figure 4-20 Ports on the DCDU-11B panel
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
189
Table 4-14 describes the terminals and switches on the DCDU-11B panel. Table 4-14 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-11B panel N o. (1) Termina l DC input terminal Label NEG(-) RTN(+) (2) Circuit breaker DC output terminal SW0 to SW9 Matched Terminal and Cable Copper bar Description Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal Circuit breakers SW0 to SW9 control ports LOAD0 to LOAD9, respectively. For the specifications of the DC output, see Table 4-13.
(3)
LOAD0 to LOAD9
l Figure 4-21 shows the toolless female connector (pressfit type) that fits LOAD0 to LOAD5. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 10 mm2. l Figure 4-22 shows the toolless female connector (pressfit type) that fits LOAD6 to LOAD9. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 4 mm2.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
190
Figure 4-21 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) that fits LOAD0 to LOAD5
Figure 4-22 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) that fits LOAD6 to LOAD9
4.9 DCDU-03B
The direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides DC power input for RRUs installed outside a cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-23 shows the DCDU-03B. Figure 4-23 DCDU-03B
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
191
Functions
The DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC power outputs. Table 4-15 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B. Table 4-15 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B DC Output Terminal LOAD0 to LOAD5 LOAD6 to LOAD8 Power-Consuming Device RRU Reserved Specification of the Circuit Breaker 20 A 12 A Circuit Breaker
SW0 to SW5 SW6 to SW8
Ports
Figure 4-24 shows the ports on the DCDU-03B panel. Figure 4-24 Ports on the DCDU-03B panel
Table 4-16 describes the terminals and switches on the DCDU-03B panel. Table 4-16 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-03B panel Terminal DC input terminal
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Label NEG(-)
Matched Terminal and Cable Copper bar
Description Negative power input wiring terminal

192
Terminal
Label RTN(+)
Matched Terminal and Cable
Description Positive power input wiring terminal
DC output terminal
LOAD0 to LOAD8
Nine one-hole OT terminals (M4). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2).
There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN (+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support M4 two-hole OT terminals, as shown in the red frame in Figure 4-24.
4.10 DCDU-11A
The direct current distribution unit-11A (DCDU-11A) provides DC power input for FAUs and RFUs.
Exterior
Figure 4-25 shows the DCDU-11A. Figure 4-25 DCDU-11A
Functions
The DCDU-11A provides ten -48 V DC power outputs. Table 4-17 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11A. Table 4-17 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11A DC Output Terminal LOAD0 to LOAD8
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Power-Consuming Device RFU
Specification of the Circuit Breaker 25 A
Circuit Breaker
SW0 to SW8
193
DC Output Terminal LOAD9
Power-Consuming Device FAU
Specification of the Circuit Breaker 25 A
Circuit Breaker
SW9
Ports
Figure 4-26 shows the ports on the DCDU-11A panel. Figure 4-26 Ports on the DCDU-11A panel
Table 4-18 describes the terminals and switches on the DCDU-11A panel. Table 4-18 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-11A panel N o. (1) Termina l DC input terminal Label NEG(-) RTN(+) (2) Circuit breaker SW0 to SW9 Matched Terminal and Cable Copper bar Description Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal Circuit breakers SW0 to SW9 control ports LOAD0 to LOAD9, respectively, to control power supplies to RFUs and FAUs.
194
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
N o. (3)
Termina l DC output terminal
Label LOAD0 to LOAD9
Matched Terminal and Cable
Description
Figure 4-27 shows For the specifications of the DC the tool-less female output, see Table 4-17. connector (pressfit type) that fits LOAD0 to LOAD9. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 4 mm2.
Figure 4-27 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
195
5 BTS3900AL Monitoring Scheme and Boards
BTS3900AL Monitoring Scheme and Boards
About This Chapter

The BTS3900AL monitoring system monitors all boards and components in a BTS3900AL cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The CCU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to monitor the surrounding environment of the BTS3900AL. 5.1 Principles for Monitoring a BTS3900AL Cabinet A BTS3900AL cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU boards. These boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarms to the MON port on the BBU using the RS485 serial bus. 5.2 Principles of Customized Alarm Input If customer devices need to be monitored by BBUs, customized alarms for the devices must be reported to the BBUs. 5.3 Monitoring Boards This section describes monitoring boards in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
196
5.1 Principles for Monitoring a BTS3900AL Cabinet

A BTS3900AL cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU boards. These boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarms to the MON port on the BBU using the RS485 serial bus.
Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single- or dual-mode is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 show the principles for monitoring a BTS3900AL cabinet.
NOTE
The devices monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU boards are not shown in the figures. For details about the monitored devices, see the description of the boards. For EMUA monitoring, see 5.2 Principles of Customized Alarm Input. l l l l l For the functions of the ports on the CMUF, see 5.3.2 CMUF. For the functions of the ports on the PMU, see 5.3.3 PMU. For the functions of the ports on the CCU, see 5.3.1 CCU. For the positions of the CCU, CMUF, and PMU in a cabinet, see 2.2 Interior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet. If a BBU is configured with either two UPEUs or one UPEU and one UEIU, the CCU can be connected to the MON0 port on one of the boards and the MON0 port on the other board must not be used. The MON1 ports cannot be connected to the CCU.
Figure 5-1 Principles for monitoring the BTS3900AL (one BTS3900AL AC cabinet, one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and one TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
197
Figure 5-2 Principles for monitoring the BTS3900AL (one BTS3900AL AC cabinet, one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and one IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet)
NOTE
l If a device is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lowerlevel device. For example, if the HAU0 and HAU1 shown in Figure 5-1 are not configured, you can directly connect the RS485 port on the EMUA to the CCU using the monitoring signal cable. l If a cabinet is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lowerlevel cabinet. For example, if BTS3900AL DC cabinet No.0 shown in Figure 5-1 is not configured, you can directly connect the FE_L port on the CCU in the IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet No.0 to the FE_R port on the CCU in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet No.0 using the inter-CCU signal cable. l All monitoring signal cables inside cabinets have been installed before delivery. Only the monitoring signal cables between cabinets need to be installed onsite. For details about the connections of all monitoring signal cables in a cabinet, see 7.3.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections.
Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Triple-Mode Base Station

A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs, which are installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the principles for monitoring a BTS3900AL cabinet.
NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are interconnected to achieve the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes, BBU0 is the root BBU and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
198
Figure 5-3 Principles for monitoring the BTS3900AL (one BTS3900AL AC cabinet, one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and one TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet)
Figure 5-4 Principles for monitoring the BTS3900AL (one BTS3900AL AC cabinet, one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and one IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet)
5.2 Principles of Customized Alarm Input

If customer devices need to be monitored by BBUs, customized alarms for the devices must be reported to the BBUs.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods: l The alarms are collected by the UPEU/UEIU in the BBU. UPEU is short for Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit, and UEIU is short for Universal Environment Interface Unit. The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the related initial configuration guide. EMUA is short for environment monitoring unit type A.
Monitoring Board Configuration

If customer devices need to be monitored by BBUs, customized alarms for the devices must be reported to the BBUs. The types of monitoring boards configured in a BTS3900AL cabinet depend on the number of customized alarm inputs, as listed in Table 5-1. Table 5-1 Monitoring board configuration Number of Customized Alarm Inputs None 1 to 16 17 to 32 Type of Monitoring Board Required UPEU UPEU+UEIU UPEU+UEIU+EMUA
NOTE
l l l
If backup power is required for BBUs, configure two UPEUs instead of configuring UPEU+UEIU. Analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA. Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package.
Using the UPEU or UEIU to Collect Customized Alarms

Each UPEU or UEIU in a BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of two UPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured in a BBU to support 16 Boolean alarm inputs. When 16 customized alarm inputs or less are configured, use the UPEU or UEIU to collect customized alarms. When using the UPEU or UEIU to collect customized alarms, connect the device to be monitored to USLP2s for surge protection and then to the EXT_ALM ports on BBUs, as shown in Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 Using the UPEU or UEIU to collect customized alarms
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
200
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU using the BBU alarm cable. Table 5-2 describes the relationships between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number of customized alarm inputs. Table 5-2 Relationships between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of customized alarm inputs Pin of an IN Port 1 2 3 4 USLP2 in the Upper Slot IN0 4+ 4(GND) 6(GND) 6+ IN1 5+ 5(GND) 7+ 7(GND) IN2 0+ 0(GND) 2(GND) 2+ IN3 1+ 1(GND) 3+ 3(GND) USLP2 in the Lower Slot IN0 12+ 12(GND) 14(GND) 14+ IN1 13+ 13(GND) 15+ 15(GND) IN2 8+ 8(GND) 10(GND) 10+ IN3 9+ 9(GND) 11+ 11(GND)
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 3.5.3 USLP2. For details about the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable, see 7.9.2 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTE
The SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signal protection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot. In this case, the USLP2 in slot 2 of the SLPU is not used.
Using the EMUA to Collect Customized Alarms

The EMUA can be configured for a site that requires more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA and reported to the CCU. Then, the CCU transfers the alarms to the BBU through an MON port. Figure 5-6 shows the cable connections. Figure 5-6 Using the EMUA to collect customized alarms
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
201
For the positions of the alarm input ports on the EMUA and the cable connections between the EMUA and sensors, see the EMUA User Guide.
5.3 Monitoring Boards

This section describes monitoring boards in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
5.3.1 CCU
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet.
Functions
The CCU performs the following functions: l l l l Provides four standard 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet ports for cascading and commissioning CCUs. Provides three uplink RS485 ports for the main device to control the CCU. Provides eight downlink RS485 ports for communication with the CMUF, FAU, and HAU. Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and door status alarms when connected to corresponding sensors.
Exterior
Figure 5-7 shows the CCU from the front. Figure 5-7 CCU

Figure 5-8 shows the front panel of the CCU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
202
Figure 5-8 Front panel of the CCU
Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 describe the ports and indicators on the front panel of the CCU. Table 5-3 Ports on the front panel of the CCU No. (1) Item CCU cascading ports Silkscreen FE_L and FE_R Description The FE_R port of the first CCU is connected to the FE_L port of the second CCU, and the FE_R port of the second CCU is connected to the FE_L port of the third CCU, and so on. The FE_L port of the first CCU does not connect to any other port. The FE0 port is reserved and the FE1 port is used for commissioning. Used for cabinet asset management. Used to manage electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors in compliance with the RS485 standard. Used for the main device to manage the CCU through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 or FE communication. Reserved. Used to supply -48 V DC power. Used to supply -48V DC power to the cabinet lamp. Used for Boolean input. The GATE port is connected to the door status sensor, the IN1 port is connected to the AC surge protector, and the IN0 port is reserved.
(2) (3) (4)
FE cascading ports Electronic label unit port Downlink COM port
FE0 and FE1 ELU D_COM0 to D_COM7 U_COM0 to U_COM2
(5)
Uplink COM port
(6) (7) (8) (9)
USB port DC power input port Port for the cabinet lamp Boolean signal port
USB RTN(+) and NEG(-) LAMP GATE, IN0, and IN1
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
203
No. (10) (11) (12) (13)
Item Enhanced protective RS485 port Port for a smoke sensor Port for a temperature sensor Indicators
Silkscreen T+T- and R +RSMOKE TEM RUN, ALM, and LINK
Description Support uplink RS485 communication. Connected to a smoke sensor. Reserved. For details about what the indicator statuses mean, see Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Indicators on the panel of the CCU Silksc reen RUN Color Green Status On Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is functioning properly according to the configuration. Software is being loaded to the board, or the board is not started. An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board. No alarm has been reported. Alarms are generated on the CCU cascading ports which may be connected improperly. The board is running properly.
Off LINK Red Steady on Steady off
5.3.2 CMUF
The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) monitors fans and the temperature of cabinet. The CMUF can be installed in a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 5-9 shows the CMUF exterior.
Figure 5-9 CMUF exterior

Figure 5-10 describes the ports and indicators on the CMUF. Figure 5-10 Ports and indicators on the CMUF
Table 5-5 describes the ports on the CMUF. Table 5-5 Ports on the CMUF No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Port TEM0 TEM1 COM_OUT COM_485 COM_IN ELU GATE IN0 SMOKE TEC FAN_EXT 0 Description Connects to the temperature sensor. Connects to the temperature sensor. RS485 port, which communicates with lower-level cascading ports and reports monitoring information. Reserved RS485 port. RS485 port, which communicates with upper-level cascading ports and receives monitoring information. Connects to the ELU, which reports the cabinet type. Boolean signal port for connecting to the door status sensor. Reserved Boolean signal port. Boolean signal port for connecting to the smoke sensor. Connects to the TEC cooler to receive alarms related to the TEC cooler. Connects to an external circulation fan.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
205
No. (14) (15) (16) (17)
Port FAN_EXT 1 FAN_IN0 FAN_IN1 PWR
Description Connects to an external circulation fan. Connects to an internal circulation fan. Connects to an internal circulation fan. Power input port, which provides DC power input for the CMUF.
Table 5-6 describes the indicators on the CMUF. Table 5-6 Indicators on the CMUF No. (7) Indica tor RUN Colo r Green Status Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Steady on Steady off (8) ALM Red Steady off Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description The CMUF is properly functioning and communicating with the upper-level device. The CMUF is properly functioning, but fails to communicate with the upperlevel device or the CMUF is not registered. The CMUF is in the power-on selfcheck state. The CMUF is faulty. No alarm is generated. An alarm is generated, and the CMUF needs to be replaced. An alarm is generated, which may be caused by a fault on a related board or port. Diagnose the fault to decide whether to replace the CMUF.
DIP Switch
The dual in-line package switch (DIP switch) on the CMUF is used to set the working mode of the CMUF based on the cabinet type. Figure 5-11 shows the location of the DIP switch on the CMUF.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
206
Figure 5-11 Location of the DIP switch on the CMUF
(1) DIP switch
Figure 5-12 shows the settings of the DIP switch on the CMUF in different cabinets. All bits of the DIP switch are set to ON by default. Figure 5-12 Settings of the DIP switch on the CMUF in different cabinets
5.3.3 PMU
The power monitoring unit (PMU) manages the power system and batteries, monitors power, and reports alarms.
Functions
The PMU implements the following functions: l l
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port. Manages the power system, and charges and discharges batteries.
Checks and reports door status alarms and standby Boolean detection results, and reports the ambient temperature, ambient humidity, battery temperature, and standby analog values. Monitors power distribution and reports alarms including dry contact alarms. Communicates with the storage battery cabinet using an RS485 port.
l l
Exterior
Figure 5-13 shows the PMU exterior. Figure 5-13 PMU exterior
NOTE
A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of the PMU.

Figure 5-14 shows ports and indicators on the front panel of the PMU. Figure 5-14 Ports and indicators on the front panel of the PMU
(1) PMU status indicator (4) COM_OUT port
(2) FE port (5) COM_485 port
(3) COM_IN port (6) COM port
Table 5-7 describes the ports on the front panel of the PMU.
Table 5-7 Ports on the front panel of the PMU Port FE COM_IN COM_OUT COM_485 COM Description Reserved. Connects to the BBU or upper-level device and reports alarms to the BBU. Connects to lower-level devices such as the EMUA and collects alarms from the lower-level devices. Reserved. Reserved.
Table 5-8 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PMU. Table 5-8 Indicators on the front panel of the PMU Indicat or RUN Color Green Status Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description The PMU is performing startup, self-check, loading, and activation. The PMU is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly. (This status does not necessarily mean that the main control board has been configured with the PMU.) The PMU is properly functioning, but fails to communicate with the upper-level device (if the PMU does not communicate with the upper-level device for 1 minute, the communication fails). The PMU is faulty or there is no DC input. A fault occurs in the PMU and the PMU needs to be replaced. No alarm is generated. An alarm is generated. Diagnose the fault to decide whether to replace the PMU.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Steady off ALM Red Steady on Steady off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
NOTE
3s to 5s after the PMU is powered on, the ALM and RUN indicators are on for about 3s.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
209
DIP Switch
There is a dual in-line package switch (DIP switch) on the left panel of the PMU. The DIP switch has eight bits among which the four least significant bits (1, 2, 3, and 4) define the monitoring address of the PMU, and the four most significant bits (5, 6, 7, and 8) are reserved for future use. The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. The monitoring address of the PMU is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in Figure 5-15. Figure 5-15 DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
210
6 BTS3900AL Components
6
About This Chapter
BTS3900AL Components
This section describes the components of a BTS3900AL cabinet. 6.1 FAU The fan assembly unit (FAU) is the fan box for the RF compartment. 6.2 ELU The Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting. 6.3 HAU The heater assembly unit (HAU) ensures that the components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is lower than the operating temperature. 6.4 Sensors This section describes the sensors configured in the cabinet, including the temperature, and door status sensors. 6.5 Storage Battery This section describes the exterior and technical specifications of storage batteries. 6.6 Cabinet Lamp The cabinet lamp provides lighting for use during maintenance. It is optional.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
211
6.1 FAU
The fan assembly unit (FAU) is the fan box for the RF compartment. Figure 6-1 shows the FAU exterior. Figure 6-1 FAU exterior

Figure 6-2 shows the ports and indicators on the FAU. Figure 6-2 Ports and indicators on the FAU
Table 6-1 describes the ports on the FAU. Table 6-1 Ports on the FAU No. (1)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Port TEM0
Description Connects to the temperature sensor.

212
No. (2) (3) (4) (5) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Port COM_OUT COM_485 COM_IN ELU GATE IN0 SMOKE TEC PWR
Description RS485 port, which communicates with lower-level cascading ports and reports monitoring information. Connects to the FAU monitoring signal cable. RS485 port, which communicates with upper-level cascading ports and receives monitoring information. Connects to the ELU, which reports the cabinet type. Reserved Boolean signal port. Reserved Boolean signal port. Reserved Boolean signal port. Connects to the TEC cooler. This port is reserved. Power input port, which provides DC power input for the FAU.
Table 6-2 describes the indicators on the FAU. Table 6-2 Indicators on the FAU No. Indi cato r RU N Color Status Description
(6)
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Steady on Steady off
The FAU is properly functioning and communicating with the upper-level device. The FAU is properly functioning, but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the FAU is not registered. The FAU is in the power-on self-check state. The FAU is faulty. No alarm is generated. An alarm is generated, and the FAU needs to be replaced. An alarm is generated, which may be caused by a fault on a related board or port. Diagnose the fault to decide whether to replace the FAU.
(7)
AL M
Red
Steady on Steady off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
213
6.2 ELU
The Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Exterior
Figure 6-3 shows an ELU. Figure 6-3 ELU
(1) Housing
(2) RJ45 connector
6.3 HAU
The heater assembly unit (HAU) ensures that the components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is lower than the operating temperature.
Exterior
Figure 6-4 shows the HAU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
214
Figure 6-4 HAU
Panel
Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the HAU. Figure 6-5 Panel of the HAU

Table 6-3 describes ports and indicators on the panel of the HAU. Table 6-3 Ports and indicators on the panel of the HAU. No. (1) (2) Label RUN COM_IN Name Running status indicator RS485 port for its upper-level device Description For details, see Table 6-4. Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
215
No. (3)
Label COM_OU T AC_IN ALM_AL L
Name RS485 port for its lower-level device AC power input socket Port for alarm reporting
Description Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported. The 110 V AC and 220 V AC voltage are supported. The port is used to monitor Boolean alarms. Boolean alarms consist of alarms related to HAU faults, fan faults, board hardware faults, and temperature sensor faults. It is reserved. For details, see Table 6-4.
(4) (5)
(6) (7)
TEST ALM
Test button Alarm indicator
Table 6-4 describes the indicators on the panel of the HAU. Table 6-4 Indicators on the panel of the HAU Label RUN Color Green Status Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) On Off ALM Red Off On Description The board is functional and communicates with its upper-level device properly. The board is functional, but the communication with its upper-level device fails. If the board does not communicate with its upper-level device for more than one minute, communication fails. The board is in the power-on self-check status. The HAU is not powered on. No alarm has been reported. An alarm has been generated, and the HAU needs to be replaced.
Specification
Table 6-5 lists the specifications of the HAU. Table 6-5 Specifications of the HAU Item Operating voltage Voltage frequency
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Specification 90 V AC to 290 V AC 45 Hz to 65 Hz
216
Item Operating temperature HAU start and stop temperature Operating humidity Operating altitude Heating power
Specification -40C to +70C (-40F to +158F) -5C to +15C (23F to 59F) 5% RH to 95% RH -60 m to +4000 m (-196.85 ft. to +13,123.20 ft.) l 400 W to 600 W (at rated voltage of 110 V AC) l 500 W to 750 W (at rated voltage of 220 V AC)
6.4 Sensors
This section describes the sensors configured in the cabinet, including the temperature, and door status sensors.
6.4.1 Door Status Sensor

Door status sensors, which monitor the door status of a cabinet, must be installed for each door of the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 6-6 shows a door status sensor. Figure 6-6 Door status sensor
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
217
6.4.2 Temperature Sensor

Temperature sensors monitor the temperature in different positions in a cabinet on a real-time basis and report the temperature to the CMUF.
Exterior
Figure 6-7 shows a temperature sensor. Figure 6-7 Temperature sensor
(1) Temperature sensor for HEX inner circulation (CMUF/TEM1)
(2) Temperature sensor for the RF compartment (FAU/TEM0)
(3) Temperature sensor for HEX inner circulation (CMUF/TEM0)
Specifications
Table 6-6 lists the specifications for a temperature sensor. Table 6-6 Specifications for a temperature sensor Item Operating voltage Temperature measurement range Temperature measurement error Specification 3.0 V DC to 5.5 V DC -55C to +125C (-67F to +257F) 0.5C (32.9F)
6.5 Storage Battery

This section describes the exterior and technical specifications of storage batteries.
Exterior
Figure 6-8 shows a storage battery of 12 V and 92 Ah. Figure 6-8 Storage battery of 12 V and 92 Ah
Technical Specifications
Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the 12 V 92 Ah storage battery. Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the 12 V 92 Ah storage battery Type 12 V, 92 Ah Dimensions (W x H x D) 127 mm x 325 mm x 560 mm (4.99 in. x 12.79 in. x 22.04 in.) Weight 60 kg (132.3 lb)
6.6 Cabinet Lamp

The cabinet lamp provides lighting for use during maintenance. It is optional.
Exterior
Figure 6-9 shows the exterior of the cabinet lamp.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
219
Figure 6-9 Cabinet lamp
Specification
Table 6-8 shows the specifications of the cabinet lamp. Table 6-8 Specifications of the cabinet lamp Item Rated voltage Rated current Specification -48 V DC 20 mA
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
220
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7
About This Chapter
BTS3900AL Cables
The BTS3900AL cables are the PGND cables, equipotential cables, power cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables. 7.1 List of BTS3900AL Cables BTS3900AL cables include power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables. 7.2 Cable Outlets in a BTS3900AL Cabinet All cables for a BTS3900AL cabinet are routed into and out of the cabinet through the cable outlets at the bottom of the cabinet. 7.3 BTS3900AL Cable Distribution The cable connections in the BTS3900AL vary according to the power supply scenarios and the configurations of the cabinet, transmission system, CPRI ports, and RF ports. 7.4 PGND Cables A PGND cable connects a cabinet to a ground bar, which provides ground protection for the cabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 30 m (98.42 ft). 7.5 Equipotential Cable An equipotential cable connects the PGND terminals of two cabinets, ensuring the equipotential bonding between cabinets and safe operation of base stations. 7.6 BTS3900AL Power Cables BTS3900AL power cables consist of the input power cables for each cabinet, and power cables for the BBU, RFUs, fan box, and batteries in each cabinet. 7.7 BTS3900AL Transmission Cables BTS3900AL transmission cables consist of E1/T1 cables, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cables, FE/GE cables, and FE/GE surge protection transfer cables. 7.8 CPRI Electrical Cable The CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and the RFU. 7.9 Signal Cables for the BTS3900AL This section describes signal cables in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.10 BTS3900AL RF Cables RF cables for the BTS3900AL consist of RF jumpers and inter-RFU RF signal cables.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
222
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.1 List of BTS3900AL Cables

BTS3900AL cables include power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables, transmission cables, CPRI cables, signal cables, and RF cables.
PGND Cables and Equipotential Cables

PGND cables and equipotential cables need to be installed onsite. Table 7-1 lists the cable connections. Table 7-1 PGND cables and equipotential cables No. Cable One End Connect or 1 7.4 PGND Cables 7.5 Equipotentia l Cable OT terminal (M6) OT terminal (M6) Installation Position Ground bar for a cabinet Ground bar for a cabinet The Other End Connect or OT terminal OT terminal (M6) Installation Position Ground busbar outside a cabinet Ground bar for a cabinet
Power Cables
Table 7-2 lists the power cables that need to be installed onsite. Table 7-3 lists the power cables that have been installed before delivery. Table 7-2 Power cables to be installed onsite No. Cable One End Connecto r 1 7.6.1 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet 7.6.9 BBU Power Cable Cord end terminal Installation Position L1, L2, L3, N, and PE terminals on the PDU05A LOAD7 and LOAD8 terminals on the DCDU-11C The Other End Connecto r Installation Position External power device
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
3v3 power connector
PWR port on the UPEU or UEIU in a BBU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
223
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connecto r Installation Position TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet power supply terminal (LOAD2) on the ETP BTS3900AL DC cabinet power supply terminal (LOAD1) on the ETP DCDU:RTN+ and DCDU0:NEG - terminals on the BusBar
The Other End Connecto r OT terminal (M6) Installation Position RTN(+) and NEG (-) terminals on the INPUT side of the DCDU-11C in a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet RTN(+)_2 and NEG(-)_2 terminals in the Input2 part on the PDU03D in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet RTN(+)_0 and NEG(-)_0 terminals in the Input0 part on the PDU03D in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet RTN(+)_0, NEG (-)_0, RTN(+)_1, and NEG(-)_1 terminals on the INPUT side of the power distribution box in a storage battery cabinet Storage battery group in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet PWR1 port on the EMUA
7.6.4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
120 series power connector
7.6.5 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL DC Cabinet
120 series power connector
OT terminal (M6)
OT terminal (M8)
OT terminal (M6)
7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries
OT terminal (M8)
RTN0+, BAT0-, RTN1 +, and BAT1terminals on the BusBar
OT terminal (M8)
OT terminal (M8) 6 7.6.10 Power Cable for the EMUA Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
RTN1+ and BAT1terminals on the BusBar LOAD1 terminal on the DCDU-11C
OT terminal (M6) Cord end terminal
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
224
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connecto r Installation Position L0, N0, and PE terminals on the junction box
The Other End Connecto r OT terminal (M4) Installation Position L, N, and PE terminals on the junction box
7.6.15 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box (for a BTS3900AL DC, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, or TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet)
OT terminal (M4)
7.6.11 Input Power Cable for the Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet
DC INPUT terminal on the power distribution box in a storage battery cabinet
LOAD4 terminal on the DCDU-11C
Table 7-3 Power cables installed before delivery No. Cable One End Connector 1 7.6.2 AC Input Power Cable for the ETP Cord end terminal Installation Position L11, N11, L12, N12, L13, and N13 terminals on the PDU05A DCDU-11C power supply terminal (LOAD0) on the ETP The Other End Connector OT terminal (M6) Installation Position L1, N1, L2, N2, L3, and N3 terminals on the ETP RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the INPUT side of the DCDU-11C RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the INPUT side of the DCDU-11C
7.6.3 Input Power Cable for the DCDU-11C (for a BTS3900AL AC cabinet)
OT terminal (M6)
OT terminal (M6)
7.6.3 Input Power Cable for the DCDU-11C (for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet)
OT terminal (M6)
RTN(+)_2 and NEG(-)_2 terminals in the Output2 part on the Per Output side of the PDU03D
OT terminal (M6)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
225
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connector Installation Position LOAD9 terminal on the DCDU-11C
The Other End Connector 3v3 power connector Installation Position PWR port on the CMUF
7.6.13 CMUF Power Cable
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) OT terminal (M4) Cord end terminal
7.6.8 CCU Power Cable
LOAD0 terminal on the DCDU-11C
RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the INPUT side of the CCU PWR port on the FAU
7.6.6 FAU Power Cable
LOAD9 terminal on the DCDU-11A
3v3 power connector
7.6.7 RFU Power Cable
LOAD0 to LOAD8 terminals on the DCDU-11A L1, N1, and PE terminals on the junction box L21 and N21 terminals on the PDU05A
3v3 power connector
PWR port on an RFU
7.6.16 HAU Power Cable
C13 straight female connector OT terminal (M4)
AC-IN port on the HAU
7.6.15 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box (for a BTS3900AL AC cabinet)
L, N, and PE terminals on the junction box
10
7.6.14 Transfer Cable for the Fan on the Front Door 7.6.9 BBU Power Cable
4-pin male connector
FAN_IN0 and FAN_IN1 ports on the CMUF LOAD5 and LOAD6 terminals on the DCDU-11C
4-pin female connector
Signal cable delivered with an internal circulation fan PWR port on the UPEU or UEIU in a BBU
11
3v3 power connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
226
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Transmission Cables and CPRI Cables

Table 7-4 lists the transmission cables and CPRI cables that need to be installed onsite. Table 7-5 lists the transmission cables and CPRI cables that have been installed before delivery. Table 7-4 Transmission cables and CPRI cables to be installed onsite No. Cable One End Connector 1 7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable DB26 male connector Installation Position OUTSIDE port on the UELP in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals OUTSIDE ports (FE0 and FE1) on the UELP in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals l FE1 port on the GTMU, WMPT, or UTRP in a BBU l SFP0 or SFP1 port on the LMPT in a BBU The Other End Connector Installation Position External transmission device
7.7.6 FE/GE Ethernet Cable
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
Routing device
7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
LC connector
l FC connector l SC connector l LC connector
Routing device
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
227
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connector Installation Position l CPRI port on the GTMU, or UBRI in a BBU l CPRI port on the WBBP in a BBU l CPRI port on the LBBP in a BBU
The Other End Connector SFP20 male connector Installation Position CPRI port on an RFU
7.8 CPRI Electrical Cable (inter-cabinet CPRI cable)
SFP20 male connector
Table 7-5 Transmission cables and CPRI cables installed before delivery No. Cable One End Connecto r 1 7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable DB25 connector Installation Position INSIDE port on the UELP in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals l FE0 port on the GTMU or WMPT in a BBU l FE0 or FE1 port on the LMPT in a BBU 3 7.7.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports RJ45 connector FE0 port on the GTMU in a BBU RJ45 connector The Other End Connector DB26 connector Installation Position E1/T1 port on the GTMU, WMPT, or UTRP in a BBU
7.7.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
INSIDE port (FE0) on the UELP in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals FE0 port on the WMPT in a BBU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
228
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connecto r Installation Position FE1 port on the GTMU in a BBU
The Other End Connector LC connector Installation Position FE1 port on the WMPT in a BBU
7.7.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports 7.8 CPRI Electrical Cable (intra-cabinet CPRI cable)
LC connector
l CPRI port on the GTMU in a BBU l CPRI port on the WBBP in a BBU l CPRI port on the LBBP in a BBU
CPRI port on an RFU
Signal Cables
Table 7-6 lists the signal cables that need to be installed onsite. Table 7-7 lists the signal cables that have been installed before delivery. Table 7-6 Signal cables to be installed onsite No. Cable One End Connecto r 1 7.9.1 Inter-BBU Signal Cable 7.9.2 BBU Alarm Cable DLC connector RJ45 connector Installation Position M0 or M1 port on the UCIU in a BBU EXT_ALM0 or EXT_ALM1 port on the UPEU or UEIU in a BBU FE_L port on the CCU The Other End Connector DLC connector RJ45 connector Installation Position CI port on the UMPT in a BBU External alarm device
7.9.3 Inter-CCU Signal Cable
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
FE_R port on the CCU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
229
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connecto r Installation Position D_COM7 port on the CCU
The Other End Connector RJ45 connector Installation Position COM_IN port on the CMUE in a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet MON0 port on the UPEU or UEIU in a BBU
7.9.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H 7.9.12 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU 7.9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA 7.9.16 GPS Clock Signal Cable 7.9.17 GPS Jumper
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
U_COM1 port on the CCU
RJ45 connector
RJ45 connector
RS485 port on the EMUA
RJ45 connector
COM_OUT port on the HAU Protect port on the GPS surge protector GPS antenna
SMA male connector Type N male connector
GPS port on the USCU in a BBU Surge port on the GPS surge protector
Type N female connector Type N male connector
Table 7-7 Signal cables installed before delivery No. Cable One End Connecto r 1 7.9.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 7.9.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the CMUF 7.9.7 Inter-HAU Signal Cable RJ45 connector Installation Position COM_IN port on the PMU The Other End Connector RJ45 connector Installation Position D_COM2 port on the CCU
RJ45 connector
COM_IN port on the CMUF
RJ45 connector
D_COM0 port on the CCU
RJ45 connector
COM_IN port on the HAU
RJ45 connector
COM_OUT port on the HAU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
230
7 BTS3900AL Cables
No.
Cable
One End Connecto r Installation Position COM_IN port on the HAU
The Other End Connector RJ45 connector Installation Position D_COM3 port on the CCU
7.9.8 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HAU 7.9.9 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor 7.9.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FAU 7.9.11 ELU Signal Cable 7.9.13 Monitoring Signal Cables for the AC Surge Protection Module 7.9.15 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable
RJ45 connector
Bare wire
Door status sensor
Bare wire
GATE port on the CCU
RJ45 connector
COM_IN port on the FAU
RJ45 connector
D_COM1 port on the CCU
7 8
RJ45 connector 2-pin terminal block
ELU AC surge protection port on the PDU05A
RJ45 connector Cord end terminal
ELU port on the CCU IN1 port on the CCU
4-pin connector
TEM port on the CMUF
Temperature sensor
l Temperatu re sensor of the device compartme nt l Temperatu re sensor of the RF compartme nt l Temperatu re sensor on the front door
10
7.9.12 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU
RJ45 connector
U_COM0 port on the CCU
RJ45 connector
MON0 port on the UPEU or UEIU in a BBU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
231
7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cables
All RF cables need to be installed onsite. Table 7-8 lists RF cables. Table 7-8 RF cables No. Cable One End Connecto r 1 7.10.1 RF Jumper DIN straight male connector QMA elbow male connector Installation Position Feeder of the antenna system The Other End Connector DIN elbow male connector Installation Position ANT_TX/ RXA and ANT_RXB ports on an RFU RX_INB port on an RFU
7.10.2 InterRFU RF Signal Cable
RX_OUTA port on an RFU
QMA elbow male connector
7.2 Cable Outlets in a BTS3900AL Cabinet

All cables for a BTS3900AL cabinet are routed into and out of the cabinet through the cable outlets at the bottom of the cabinet.
Cable Outlets in a BTS3900AL Cabinet

Figure 7-1 shows the cable outlets at the bottom of a BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 7-1 Plan view of the cable outlets in a BTS3900AL cabinet
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
232
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-9 describes the cable routing at the cable outlets in a BTS3900AL cabinet. Table 7-9 Cable routing at the cable outlets No. 1 Item Left cable outlet Description Used for routing PGND cables, equipotential cables, AC/DC power cables, GPS jumpers, CPRI fiber optic cables, and CPRI electrical cables Used for routing RF jumpers and CPRI electrical cables Used for routing four IBBS700D/IBBS700T power cables and four RRU power cables Used for routing five RRU power cables Used for routing Boolean alarm cables, transmission cables, RS485 signal cables, CPRI optical cables, and CPRI electrical cables Used for routing external AC input power cables
2 3 4 5
RF cable outlet module Right cable outlet 1 Right cable outlet 2 Right cable outlet 3 External input power cable outlet
7.3 BTS3900AL Cable Distribution

The cable connections in the BTS3900AL vary according to the power supply scenarios and the configurations of the cabinet, transmission system, CPRI ports, and RF ports.
7.3.1 Power Cable Connections

This section describes the power cable connections for a BTS3900AL cabinet supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections for the following scenario: 1 BTS3900AL AC + 1 BTS3900AL DC + 1 TMC11H (Ver.C) using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power input.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
233
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-2 Power cable connections (1)
Table 7-10 describes the power cables. Table 7-10 Power cable description (1) Cable Number P0 P1 to P4 P5 P6 P7, P16 P8 P9, P11 P10 P12, P15 P13, P14 P17 to P25
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Description For details, see 7.6.1 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet. For details, see 7.6.9 BBU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.8 CCU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.13 CMUF Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.3 Input Power Cable for the DCDU-11C. For details, see 7.6.2 AC Input Power Cable for the ETP. For details, see 7.6.5 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL DC Cabinet. For details, see 7.6.4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H. For details, see 7.6.15 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box. For details, see 7.6.16 HAU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.7 RFU Power Cable.
234
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Cable Number P26 P27 to P29
Description For details, see 7.6.6 FAU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries.
Figure 7-3 shows the power cable connections for the following scenario: 1 BTS3900AL AC + 1 BTS3900AL DC + 1 IBBS700D using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power input. The power cable connections for an IBBS700T and those for an IBBS700D are the same. Therefore, this section describes only the power cable connections for an IBBS700D. Figure 7-3 Power cable connections (2)
Table 7-11 describes the power cables. Table 7-11 Power cable description (2) Cable Number P0 P1 to P4 P5 P6 P7, P10 Description For details, see 7.6.1 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet. For details, see 7.6.9 BBU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.8 CCU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.13 CMUF Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.3 Input Power Cable for the DCDU-11C.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Cable Number P8 P9, P11 P12, P13, P16 P14, P15 P17 to P25 P26 P27 to P33 P34
Description For details, see 7.6.2 AC Input Power Cable for the ETP. For details, see 7.6.5 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL DC Cabinet. For details, see 7.6.15 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box. For details, see 7.6.16 HAU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.7 RFU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.6 FAU Power Cable. For details, see 7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries. For details, see 7.6.11 Input Power Cable for the Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet.
7.3.2 Transmission Cable Connections

The BTS3900AL supports four modes: GSM only, UMTS only, GSM+UMTS with cotransmission, and GSM+UMTS with separate transmission. Board configurations and transmission cable connections vary according to these modes.
Transmission Cable Connections for a Single-Mode Base Station

In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration Principles
l l l l In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data. The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP. The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP. The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected to the SLPU.
Application Scenario
Table 7-12 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in different modes.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
236
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-12 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station Trans missi on Mode Trans missio n over the E1 Cable Mode Supp orted GSM only Application Scenario Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and UTRP.
"1" in the Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
UMTS only
Scenario 1: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT.
"2" in the Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections in scenario 1. "3" in Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections. "4" in the Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
LTE only
The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.
Trans missio n over the FE Cable
GSM only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
UMTS only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the UTRP2. Scenario 3: The UTRP9 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the UTRP9. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
237
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted LTE only
Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
Figure 7-4 shows the cable connections supported by each mode. Figure 7-4 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable
T2: 7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Common Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
l In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
7 BTS3900AL Cables
l l l l l l
In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side. In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side. In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side. The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP. The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP. The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected to the SLPU.
Table 7-13 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different transmission modes. Table 7-13 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmission mode Trans missi on Mode TDM Comm on Trans missio n IP Over E1/T1 Comm on Trans missio n Mode Supp orted GSM +UMT S Application Scenario Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
"1" in the Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections in scenario 1. "2" in the Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port.
GSM +LTE
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port or optical port. The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port or optical port.
"3" in Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections. "4" in the Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections.
239
UMTS +LTE
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted
Legend
IP over GSM FE/GE +UMT Comm S on Trans missio n
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to the UTRP using the optical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 5: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the backplane.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
240
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Mode Supp orted UMTS +LTE
Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port or electrical port on the UTRPc. Scenario 2: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port. Scenario 3: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port. Scenario 4: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT through the backplane.
Route Backu p Mode with IP Comm on Trans missio n
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
241
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Trans missi on Mode
Legend
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the optical port.
Hybrid Trans missio n
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the electrical port.
Figure 7-5 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
242
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-5 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common transmission mode
T1: 7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable T5: 7.7.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports
T2: 7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable
T3: 7.7.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports T7: 7.7.6 FE/GE Ethernet Cable
T4: 7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable -
T6: 7.7.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
Transmission Cable Connections for a Dual-Mode Base Station in Independent Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
243
7 BTS3900AL Cables
l l l The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP. The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP. The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected to the SLPU.
Table 7-14 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different transmission modes. Table 7-14 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent transmission mode Trans missi on Mode GSM E1/T1 +UMT S E1/ T1 GSM FE/GE +UMT S FE/ GE Mode Supp orted GSM +UMT S Application Scenario Legend
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"1" in the Figure 7-6 shows the cable connections. "2" in the Figure 7-6 shows the cable connections in scenario 1.
GSM +UMT S
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
GSM E1/T1 +LTE FE/GE
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS FE/GE +LTE FE/GE
GSM +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the GTMU. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE electrical port on the GTMU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
244
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Trans missi on Mode UMTS E1/T1 +LTE FE/GE
Legend
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS FE/GE +LTE FE/GE
UMTS +LTE
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the WMPT or UMPT. Scenario 2: The transmission cables are connected to the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
Figure 7-6 shows the cable connections supported by each mode. Figure 7-6 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent transmission mode
T1: 7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge T2: 7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber T4: 7.7.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable Optic Cable Protection Transfer Cable T5: 7.7.6 FE/GE Ethernet Cable -
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
245
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding. l l l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction, and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion. In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode. The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL +UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-15 lists the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. Table 7-15 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station Triple Mode GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded) GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded) UO (BBU0) + GL (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded) GO (BBU0) + UL (BBU1) (BBUs not cascaded) Mode Specification BBU0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU1 works in LTE only mode. BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode and BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. BBU0 works in UMTS only mode and BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. BBU0 works in GSM only mode and BBU1 works in UMTS+LTE mode. Reference l In dual mode, common and independent transmission are supported. For details, see the Transmission Cable Connections for a DualMode Base Station in Common Transmission Mode and the Transmission Cable Connections for a DualMode Base Station in Independent Transmission Mode. l For details about the transmission cable connections for a singlemode base station, see the Transmission Cable Connections for a Single-Mode Base Station. For details, see the "1" or the "2" in the Figure 7-7. For details, see the "3" or the "4" in the Figure 7-7. For details, see the "5" in the Figure 7-7.
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded) GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded) GU (BBU0) + UL (BBU1) (BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU1 works in LTE only mode. BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode and BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. BBU0 works in GSM +UMTS mode and BBU1 works in UMTS+LTE mode.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
246
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-7 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station. Figure 7-7 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1: 7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
7.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections

CPRI cables are connected in star or chain topology. In star topology, each RFU is connected to the BBU separately. In chain topology, RFUs are cascaded before connecting to the BBU.
CPRI Cable Connections for a GO Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a GSM only (GO) base station. In the scenario where a GO base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: The GRFUs/DRFUs work in dual-band mode. The GRFUs/DRFUs working in the low frequency band serve three sectors. The GRFUs/DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The GRFUs/DRFUs working in the high frequency band serve three sectors and are connected in the star topology. Figure 7-8 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
247
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-8 CPRI cable connections (1)
In the scenario where a GO base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs: The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The RRU3004s/RRU3008s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the star topology.Figure 7-9 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
NOTE
If RFUs and RRUs can work in GSM mode, the GTMUb must be configured in a BBU3900. The RFUs working in GSM mode are connected to the GTMUb, and the RRUs working in GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.
CPRI Cable Connections for a UO Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a UMTS only (UO) base station.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
In the scenario where a UO base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: The MRFUs and WRFUs work in single-band mode. The MRFUs serve three sectors and are connected in the star topology. The WRFUs also serve three sectors, and support MIMO configuration or support expanded bandwidth and carriers. The WRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. Figure 7-10 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-10 CPRI cable connections (1)
In the scenario where a UO base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs: The RFUs and RFUs work in single-band mode. The WRFUs serve three sectors, and support MIMO configuration or support expanded bandwidth and carriers. The WRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The RRU3804s serve three sectors and are connected in the star topology. Figure 7-11 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-11 CPRI cable connections (2)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
249
7 BTS3900AL Cables
CPRI Cable Connections for an LO Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for an LTE only (LO) base station. In the scenario where an LO base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: The LRFUs work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO. The LRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of LRFUs serve one sector. Figure 7-12 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-12 CPRI cable connections (1)
In the scenario where an LO base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: The MRFUs work in single-band mode, use 10 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO. The MRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of MRFUs serve one sector. Figure 7-13 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-13 CPRI cable connections (2)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
250
7 BTS3900AL Cables
In the scenario where an LO base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: The LRFUs work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO. The LRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of LRFUs serve one sector. Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15 show the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-14 CPRI cable connections (3)
In the scenario where an LO base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs: The LRFUs work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 4T4R MIMO. The LRFUs serve three sectors, and each pair of LRFUs serve one sector. The RRU3221s work in single-band mode, use 20 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO. The RRU3221s serve three sectors. Figure 7-16 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
CPRI Cable Connections for a GU Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a GSM+UMTS (GU) base station. In the scenario where a GU base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: l l l The MRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the dualstar topology. The WRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the star topology. The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the star topology.
Figure 7-17 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-17 CPRI cable connections (1)
In the scenario where a GU base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs:
7 BTS3900AL Cables
l l l
The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/ DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The WRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the star topology. The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the dual-star topology.
CPRI Cable Connections for a GL Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a GSM+LTE (GL) base station. In the scenario where a GL base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: l l l The MRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the dualstar topology. The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the star topology. The LRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology.
Figure 7-19 shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
253
7 BTS3900AL Cables
In the scenario where a GL base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs: l l l The GRFUs/DRFUs work in single-band mode, and serve three sectors. The GRFUs/ DRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The LRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 20 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology. The RRU3908s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, and are connected in the dual-star topology.

NOTE
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
254
7 BTS3900AL Cables
CPRI Cable Connections for a UL Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a UMTS+LTE (UL) base station. In the scenario where a UL base station is configured with RFUs but without RRUs: l l The WRFUs work in single-band mode, and serve three sectors. The WRFUs in the same sector are cascaded. The LRFUs work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology.
In the scenario where a UL base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs: l The WRFUs work in dual-band mode. Both the WRFUs working in the high frequency band and the WRFUs working in the low frequency band serve three sectors. The WRFUs are connected in the star topology. The RRU3221s work in single-band mode, serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support 2T2R MIMO, and are connected in the star topology.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
255
7 BTS3900AL Cables
CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the CPRI cable connections for a triple-mode base station. There are six types of triple-mode base station: GU+L (BBUs not interconnected), GL+U (BBUs not interconnected), U+GL (BBUs not interconnected), GU+L (UCIU+UCIU), GL+U (UCIU +UCIU), and GU+L (UCIU+UMPT). A single baseband unit (BBU) can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are required for a Triple-mode base station.
NOTE
GU+L (BBUs Not Interconnected)

In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS (GU) mode. CPRI Cable Connections for a GU Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU1 works in LTE mode. CPRI Cable Connections for an LO Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GL+U (BBUs Not Interconnected)

In the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE (GL) mode. CPRI Cable Connections for a GL Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. In the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS mode. CPRI Cable Connections for a UO Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
U+GL (BBUs Not Interconnected)

In the U+GL (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS mode. CPRI Cable Connections for a UO Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. In the U+GL (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, BBU1 works in GL mode. CPRI Cable Connections for a GL Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, BBU0 and BBU1 are interconnected by using UCIU and UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. Figure 7-23 and Figure 7-24 show the CPRI cable connections in this scenario. Figure 7-23 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario (1)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
257
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-24 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario (2)
7.3.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for a BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 7-25 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for the following scenario: 1 BTS3900AL AC+1 BTS3900AL DC+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable connections (1)
Table 7-16 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-16 Monitoring signal cable connections (1) Cable Number S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Description For details, see 7.9.3 Inter-CCU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU. For details, see 7.9.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FAU. For details, see 7.9.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H. For details, see 7.9.1 Inter-BBU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.9 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor. For details, see 7.9.13 Monitoring Signal Cables for the AC Surge Protection Module. For details, see 7.9.11 ELU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the CMUF. For details, see 7.9.8 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HAU. For details, see 7.9.12 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU. For details, see 7.9.7 Inter-HAU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA.
S7 S8 S9 S10 and S11 S12 S13
Figure 7-26 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for the configuration of 1 BTS3900AL AC+1 BTS3900AL DC+1 IBBS700D. The monitoring signal cable connections for the scenario with an IBBS700T are the same as those for the scenario with an IBBS700D. Therefore, this section describes only the monitoring signal cable connections for the scenario with an IBBS700D.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
259
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable connections (2)
Table 7-17 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 7-17 Monitoring signal cable connections (2) Cable Number S0 and S4 S1 S2 S3 S5 S6 Description For details, see 7.9.3 Inter-CCU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU. For details, see 7.9.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FAU. For details, see 7.9.1 Inter-BBU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.9 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor. For details, see 7.9.13 Monitoring Signal Cables for the AC Surge Protection Module. For details, see 7.9.11 ELU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the CMUF. For details, see 7.9.8 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HAU. For details, see 7.9.12 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU.
S7 S8 S9 S10 and S11
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Cable Number S12 S13
Description For details, see 7.9.7 Inter-HAU Signal Cable. For details, see 7.9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA.
7.3.5 RF Cable Connections

This chapter describes the RF cable connections for various types of RF modules.
RF Cable Connections for DRFUs

The DRFU supports two carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for DRFUs with a single sector.
Cable Connections in 1T2R Mode

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One DRFU
Figure 7-27 describes the RF cable connections. Figure 7-27 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
261
7 BTS3900AL Cables
With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One DRFU
Figure 7-27 shows the RF cable connections. With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for four carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two DRFUs
Figure 7-28 describes the RF cable connections. Figure 7-28 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One DRFU
Figure 7-27 shows the RF cable connections. With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two DRFUs
Figure 7-28 shows the RF cable connections.

7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections for GRFUs

The GRFU supports six carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for GRFUs with a single sector. The GRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.
Cable Connections with Three Carriers

The following items are configured for three carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One GRFU
Figure 7-29 describes the RF cable connections. Figure 7-29 Cable connections with three carriers
Cable Connections with Nine Carriers

The following items are configured for nine carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two GRFUs
Figure 7-30 describes the RF cable connections.

7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-30 Cable Connections with Nine Carriers
Cable Connections with 14 Carriers

The following items are configured for 14 carriers: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Three GRFUs
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
264
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-31 Cable connections with 14 carriers
Cable Connections with 24 Carriers

The following items are configured for 24 carriers: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Four GRFUs
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
265
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-32 Cable connections with 24 carriers
RF Cable Connections for WRFUs

The WRFU supports four carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUs with a single sector.

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One WRFU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
266
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-33 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)
With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUs
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
267
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-34 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUs

With two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUs
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
268
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-35 Cable connections in 2T4R mode
Cable Connections in 2x2 MIMO Mode

The base station in UMTS only mode supports 2x2 MIMO. Figure 7-34 shows the cable connections.
RF Cable Connections for WRFUd

The WRFUd supports a maximum of six carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUds with a single sector.

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One WRFUd
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
269
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-36 Cable connections in 2T2R (I)
With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUds.

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUds
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
270
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-37 Cable connections in 4T4R mode (II)
RF Cable Connections for WRFUe

The WRFUe supports a maximum of six carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUes with a single sector.

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One WRFUe
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
271
7 BTS3900AL Cables
With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for five to eight carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUes.

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two WRFUes
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
272
7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections for LRFUs

The LRFU supports a single carrier. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUs supporting a single sector. The LRFU supports only the 2T2R configuration.
RF Cable Connections in 2T2R Mode

In 2T2R mode, the following items are configured: l l A dual-polarized antenna An LRFU
Figure 7-40 shows RF cable connections.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
273
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-40 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode
RF Cable Connections in 4T4R mode

In 4T4R mode, the following items are configured: l l Two dual-polarized antennas Two LRFUs
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
274
7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections for LRFUe

The LRFUe supports one carrier. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUes with a single sector.

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One LRFUe
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
275
7 BTS3900AL Cables

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured for one to four carriers: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two LRFUes
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
276
7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections for CRFUd

The CRFUd supports a single carrier. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for CRFUd with a single sector.

In 2T2R mode, the following items are configured: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One CRFUd
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
277
7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections in 4T4R mode

In 4T4R mode, the following items are configured: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two CRFUds
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
278
7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections for MRFUs

The MRFU supports six carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUs supporting a single sector. The MRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.
RF Cable Connections in G3U1 mode

When three GSM carriers and one UMTS carrier are configured, the following items are required: l l A dual-polarized antenna An MRFU
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
279
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-46 RF cable connections in G3U1 mode
RF Cable Connections in G9U1 mode

When nine GSM carriers and one UMTS carrier are configured, the following items are required: l l A dual-polarized antenna Two MRFUs
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
280
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-47 RF cable connections in G9U1 mode
RF Cable Connections in G2U2 Mode

When two GSM carriers and two UMTS carriers are configured, the following items are required: l l A dual-polarized antenna An MRFU
RF Cable Connections in G6U2 Mode

When six GSM carriers and two UMTS carriers are configured, the following items are required: l l A dual-polarized antenna Two MRFUs
RF Cable Connections in G4L1 MIMO Mode

When the MRFU works in LTE 2T2R MIMO mode, with four GSM carriers and one LTE carrier configured, the following items are required: l l A dual-polarized antenna Two MRFUs

7 BTS3900AL Cables
RF Cable Connections in G8L1 MIMO Mode

When the MRFU works in LTE 2T2R MIMO mode, with eight GSM carriers and one LTE carrier configured, the following items are required: l l A dual-polarized antenna Two MRFUs
RF Cable Connections for MRFUd

The MRFUd supports a maximum of eight GSM carriers, six UMTS carriers, or two LTE carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUds with a single sector.

With two TX channels and two RX channels, the following items are configured: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One MRFUd
Figure 7-48 shows the RF cable connections. Figure 7-48 Cable connections in 2T2R
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
282
7 BTS3900AL Cables

With four TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two MRFUds
Figure 7-49 shows the RF cable connections. Figure 7-49 Cable connections in 4T4R mode
RF Cable Connections for MRFUe

The MRFUe supports a maximum of eight GSM carriers, four UMTS carriers, or two LTE carriers. The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUes with a single sector.

With one TX channel and two RX channels, the following items are configured: l l A pair of dual-polarized antennas One MRFUe
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
283
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-50 Cable connections in 1T2R

With two TX channels and four RX channels, the following items are configured: l l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennas Two MRFUes
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
284
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.3.6 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections

Two BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supporting capability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the service processing capability of a single mode.
NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU, and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
UCIU+UMPT
In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown in Figure 7-52.
NOTE
In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-18 lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
285
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-18 BBU configurations Scenario Description Triple-Mode Scenario BBU0 GU GL GU Single-Mode Scenario U BBU1 L U UL U
Figure 7-52 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT
WBBPf+WBBPf
In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband data. As shown in Figure 7-52, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.
NOTE
In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.
Figure 7-53 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs
7.4 PGND Cables

A PGND cable connects a cabinet to a ground bar, which provides ground protection for the cabinet. The maximum length of a PGND cable is 30 m (98.42 ft).
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
Figure 7-54 shows a PGND cable. Figure 7-54 PGND cable
(1) OT terminal (M6)
Description
Table 7-19 describes a PGND cable. Table 7-19 PGND cable Cable PGND cable Color Green and yellow Cross-sectional Area of a Wire 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2)
7.5 Equipotential Cable

An equipotential cable connects the PGND terminals of two cabinets, ensuring the equipotential bonding between cabinets and safe operation of base stations.
Exterior
Figure 7-55 shows an equipotential cable. Figure 7-55 Equipotential cable
Description
Table 7-20 describes an equipotential cable.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-20 Equipotential cable Cable Equipotential cable Color Green and yellow Cross-sectional Area of a Core Wire 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2)
NOTE
A yellow-and-green cable with a cross-sectional area of 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) is used when a BTS3900AL AC cabinet and a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet are installed side by side.
7.6 BTS3900AL Power Cables

BTS3900AL power cables consist of the input power cables for each cabinet, and power cables for the BBU, RFUs, fan box, and batteries in each cabinet.
7.6.1 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet

The input power cable for the BTS3900AL AC cabinet feeds AC power into the PDU05A in a cabinet. A PDU05A supports 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V AC three-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. The maximum length of an input power cable is 15 m (49.21 ft).
Exterior
Figure 7-56 shows a 220 V AC single-phase input power cable. Figure 7-56 220 V AC single-phase input power cable
(1) Cord end terminal
NOTE
Different types of the input power cable for the BTS3900AL AC cabinet consist of different numbers of wires. Figure 7-56 shows the structure of a 220 V AC single-phase input power cable.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
288
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Specifications
Table 7-21 lists the specifications of different input power cables for the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Table 7-21 Specifications of the input power cables for the BTS3900AL AC cabinet Cable 220 V AC threephase power cable Wire L1 wire L2 wire L3 wire N wire PE cable 220 V AC singlephase power cable L wire N wire PE cable 110 V AC dual-livewire L1 wire L2 wire N wire PE cable Color Brown Black Gray Blue Green and yellow Brown Blue Green and yellow Black Red White Green 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) Cross-sectional Area of a Wire 10 mm2 (0.015 in.2)
NOTE
The colors and structures of cables delivered by Huawei vary according to countries and areas. If cables are purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.
7.6.2 AC Input Power Cable for the ETP

An AC input power cable for the ETP feeds AC power from the PDU05A to the AC input wiring terminal on the ETP.
Exterior
Figure 7-57 shows an AC input power cable for the ETP.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
289
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-57 AC input power cable for the ETP
Specifications
Table 7-22 lists the specifications of an AC input power cable for the ETP Table 7-22 Specifications of an AC input power cable for the ETP Cable AC input power cable for the ETP Wire L wire N wire Color Brown Blue Cross-sectional Area of a Wire 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
7.6.3 Input Power Cable for the DCDU-11C

An input power cable for the DCDU-11C feeds DC power into the DCDU-11C.
Exterior
Figure 7-58 shows an input power cable for the DCDU-11C. Figure 7-58 Input power cable for the DCDU-11C
Specifications
Table 7-23 lists the specifications of an input power cable for the DCDU-11C.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-23 Specifications of an AC input power cable for the DCDU-11C Cable Input power cable for the DCDU-11C Wire RTN(+) NEG(-) Color Black Blue Cross-sectional Area of a Wire 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
7.6.4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

An input power cable for the TMC11H feeds the DC power from the ETP into the TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 7-59 lists the specifications of an input power cable for the TMC11H. Figure 7-59 Input power cable for the TMC11H
(1) Power series 120 connector
Specifications
Table 7-24 lists the specifications of an input power cable for the TMC11H. Table 7-24 Specifications of an input power cable for the TMC11H Cable Input power cable for the TMC11H Wire RTN(+) NEG(-) Color Black Blue Cross-sectional Area of a Wire 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
7.6.5 Input Power Cable for the BTS3900AL DC Cabinet

The input power cable for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet feeds DC power into a BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
Figure 7-60 shows the 100 A input power cables for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Each of the cables is low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) cables and its cross-sectional area is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2). The BTS3900AL DC cabinet requires one pair of such cables. Figure 7-60 Input power cable for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet (1)
(1) Power series 120 connector
(2) OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or 0.025 in.2, LSZH)
NOTE
If the preceding power cables are not delivered by default, one pair of 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) PVC power cables that are locally purchased can be the substitutes.
Figure 7-61 shows the 160 A input power cables for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Each of the cables is LSZH cables and its cross-sectional area is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2). The BTS3900AL DC cabinet requires two pairs of such cables. Figure 7-61 Input power cable for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet (2)
NOTE
If the preceding power cables are not delivered by default, one pair of 70 mm2 (0.108 in.2) PVC power cables or two pairs of 25 mm2 (0.039 in.2) PVC power cables that are locally purchased can be the substitutes.
Specifications
Table 7-25 lists the specifications of an input power cable for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
292
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-25 Specifications of an input power cable for a PDU03D Cable Input power cable for the PDU03D Wire RTN(+) NEG(-) Color Black Blue
7.6.6 FAU Power Cable

An FAU power cable feeds DC power from the DCDU-11A into the FAU.
Exterior
Figure 7-62 shows an FAU power cable. Figure 7-62 FAU power cable
(1) 3V3 power connector
(2) Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
Specifications
Table 7-26 lists the specifications of an FAU power cable. Table 7-26 Specifications of an FAU power cable Cable FAU power cable Wire RTN(+) NEG(-) Color Black Blue
7.6.7 RFU Power Cable

An RFU power cable feeds -48 V DC power into an RFU in the RFC.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
293
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
The RFU power cable has a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end, and a 3V3 power connector at the other end. Each RFU is configured with an independent power cable. All these cables have the same exterior and structure. Figure 7-63 shows an RFU power cable. Figure 7-63 RFU power cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-27 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the RFU power cable. Table 7-27 Pin assignment for the wires of the RFU power cable Wire W1 W2 X1 End X1.A1 X1.A3 X2 End X2.2 X2.1 Wire Color in Most Area Blue Black Wire Color in Other Area Gray Blue
7.6.8 CCU Power Cable

A CCU power cable feeds -48 V DC power from the DCDU-11C into the CCU.
Exterior
Figure 7-64 shows a CCU power cable.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
294
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-64 CCU power cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-28 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a CCU power cable. Table 7-28 Pin assignment for the wires of a CCU power cable Cable W1 W2 X1 End X1.A1 X1.A2 X2 End X2.A1 X2.A2 Wire Color Blue Black
7.6.9 BBU Power Cable

A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-65 shows a BBU power cable. The cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and a tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at the other end.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
295
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-65 BBU power cable
Pin Assignment
The BBU power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-29 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable. Table 7-29 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable Wire W1 W2 X1 End X1.A1 X1.A3 X2 End X2.2 X2.1 Wire Color in Most Area Blue Black Wire Color in Other Area Gray Blue
7.6.10 Power Cable for the EMUA

A power cable for the EMUA leads -48 V DC power to the EMUA.
Exterior
Figure 7-66 shows a power cable for the EMUA. Figure 7-66 Power cable for the EMUA
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
296
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Cable Specification
Table 7-30 describes the specifications of the power cable for the EMUA. Table 7-30 Specifications of the power cable for the EMUA Cable Power cable for the EMUA Wire RTN(+) NEG(-) Wire Color in Most Area Black Blue Wire Color in Other Area Blue Gray
7.6.11 Input Power Cable for the Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet
An input power cable feeds DC power into the power distribution box in a battery cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 7-67 shows an input power cable for the power distribution box in a battery cabinet. Figure 7-67 Input power cable for the power distribution box in a battery cabinet
Pin Assignment
Table 7-31 describes the pin assignment for the wires of an input power cable for the power distribution box in a battery cabinet.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-31 Pin assignment for the wires of an input power cable for the power distribution box in a battery cabinet Cable W1 W2 X1 End X1.A1 X1.A2 X2 End X2.A1 X2.A2 Wire Color Blue Black
7.6.12 Power Cables for Batteries

This section describes the input power cables for batteries, power cables between the battery group and the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, and copper bars between batteries. The maximum length of an input power cable for batteries is 5 m (16.4 ft).
Batteries in the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet

Figure 7-68 shows the power cables used between the BusBar and batteries. Figure 7-68 Power cable used between the BusBar and batteries
(1) OT terminal (M8, 35 mm2 or 0.054 in.2)
NOTE
The RTN(+) wire of the power cable between the BusBar and batteries is red, and the NEG(-) wire of the power cable is black.
Auxiliary Battery Cabinet for the BTS3900AL AC Cabinet

Figure 7-69 shows an input power cable for batteries.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
298
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-69 Input power cable for batteries
NOTE
The RTN(+) wire of the input power cable for batteries is red, and the NEG(-) wire of the input power cable is black.
Figure 7-70 shows a cable between the battery group and the power distribution box in the battery cabinet. Figure 7-70 Cable between the battery group and the power distribution box in the battery cabinet
NOTE
l The M6 OT terminal is connected to a battery group, and the M8 OT terminal is connected to a ground screw for the power distribution box in the battery cabinet. l The RTN(+) wire of the input power cable for batteries is red, and the NEG(-) wire of the input power cable is black.
Copper bars between batteries are delivered with batteries. Figure 7-71 shows a copper bar between batteries. Figure 7-71 Copper bar between batteries
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
299
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.6.13 CMUF Power Cable

A CMUF power cable feeds -48 V DC power from the DCDU-11C into the CMUF.
Exterior
Figure 7-72 shows a CMUF power cable. Figure 7-72 CMUF power cable
7.6.14 Transfer Cable for the Fan on the Front Door

The transfer cable for the fan on the front door is used to extend the cable delivered with the inner air circulation fan.
Exterior
Figure 7-73 shows the transfer cable for the fan on the front door. Figure 7-73 Transfer cable for the fan on the front door
(1) 4-pin male connector
(2) 4-pin female connector
7.6.15 Input Power Cable for a Junction Box

An input power cable for a junction box feeds AC power into a junction box, which provides four AC power outputs to heater assembly units (HAUs).
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
There are two types of input power cables for junction boxes, as shown in Figure 7-74 and Figure 7-75. Figure 7-74 shows a cable connecting the PDU05A to the junction box. Figure 7-75 shows a power cable connecting two cascaded junction boxes. Figure 7-74 Input power cable for a junction box (1)
(1) OT terminal (M4, 2.5 mm2 or 0.004 in.2)
Figure 7-75 Input power cable for a junction box (2)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-32 lists the pin assignment of an input power cable for a junction box.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
301
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-32 Pin assignment of an input power cable for a junction box Number W1 W2 W3 Color Brown Blue Green and yellow Label L N PE
7.6.16 HAU Power Cable

A heater assembly unit (HAU) power cable feeds AC power from a junction box into an HAU.
Exterior
Figure 7-76 shows an HAU power cable. Figure 7-76 HAU power cable
(2) C13 straight female connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-33 lists the pin assignment of an HAU power cable. Table 7-33 Pin assignment of an HAU power cable Number W1 W2 W3 Color Brown Green and yellow Blue Label L PGND N
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
302
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.7 BTS3900AL Transmission Cables

BTS3900AL transmission cables consist of E1/T1 cables, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cables, FE/GE cables, and FE/GE surge protection transfer cables.
7.7.1 E1/T1 Cable

An E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment. The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).
Exterior
The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable. One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-77 shows an E1/T1 cable. Figure 7-77 E1/T1 signal cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 7-34 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables. Table 7-34 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables Cable 75 ohm E1 coaxial cable One End DB26 male connector The Other End L9 male connector L9 female connector SMB female connector BNC male connector SMZ male connector SMZ female connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
303
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 7-35, Table 7-36, and Table 7-37 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable. Table 7-35 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26 Type(1) Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 8 6 4 2 7 5 3 Coaxial Unit No. 1 Wire Label RX1+ RX1RX2+ RX2RX3+ RX3RX4+ RX4TX1+ TX1TX2+ TX2TX3+ TX3TX4+ TX4-
NOTE
(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.
Table 7-36 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X.1 X.2 X.3 Wire Color Blue White Orange Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Wire Label RX1+ RX1RX2+
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
304
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X.4 X.5 X.6 X.7 X.8 X.19 X.20 X.21 X.22 X.23 X.24 X.25 X.26
Wire Color White Green White Brown White Gray White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red
Wire Type
Wire Label RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+ RX3-
Twisted pair
RX4+ RX4-
Twisted pair
TX1+ TX1-
Twisted pair
TX2+ TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+ TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+ TX4-
Table 7-37 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X.1 X.2 X.3 X.4 X.5 X.6 X.7 X.8 X.19 X.20 X.21 X.22 Wire Color Blue and white White and blue Orange and white White and orange Green and white White and green Brown and white White and brown Gray and white White and gray Blue and red Red and blue Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Wire Label RX1+ RX1RX2+ RX2RX3+ RX3RX4+ RX4TX1+ TX1TX2+ TX2-
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
305
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X.23 X.24 X.25 X.26
Wire Color Orange and red Red and orange Green and red Red and green
Wire Type Twisted pair
Wire Label TX3+ TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+ TX4-
7.7.2 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the transmission board. This cable is optional. The length of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable is 1.2 m (3.94 ft).
Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25 male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-78. Figure 7-78 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-38 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable. Table 7-38 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.20 X1.19 X1.4
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Type Twisted pair cable
Pin on the DB25 Male Connector X2.2 X2.3
Twisted pair cable

X2.4
306
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.3 X1.22 X1.21 X1.6 X1.5 X1.24 X1.23 X1.8 X1.7 X1.1 X1.2 X1.25 X1.26
Type
Pin on the DB25 Male Connector X2.5
Twisted pair cable
X2.6 X2.7
Twisted pair cable
X2.8 X2.9
Twisted pair cable
X2.10 X2.11
Twisted pair cable
X2.12 X2.13
Twisted pair cable
X2.14 X2.15
Twisted pair cable
X2.24 X2.25
7.7.3 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

An FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission equipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).
Exterior
The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector, or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-79, Figure 7-80, Figure 7-81. Figure 7-79 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-80 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
307
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-81 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)
CAUTION
To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords, adhere to the following rules: l l The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission equipment. The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission equipment.
7.7.4 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports

This cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based cotransmission.
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-82. Figure 7-82 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports
(1) RJ45 connector
7.7.5 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports

This cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission in IP mode.
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-83.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-83 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
7.7.6 FE/GE Ethernet Cable

The FE/GE Ethernet cable connects the BBU to the external transmission equipment through routing equipment and transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of an FE/GE Ethernet cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).
Exterior
The FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable, which has an RJ45 connector at each end. Figure 7-84 shows an FE/GE Ethernet cable. Figure 7-84 FE/GE Ethernet cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-39 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable. Table 7-39 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE Ethernet cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Wire Color Orange White and orange Green White and green Blue
Pin on the RJ45 Connector X2.2 X2.1
Twisted pair
X2.6 X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4
309
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Pin on the RJ45 Connector X1.5 X1.8 X1.7
Wire Color White and blue Brown White and brown
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8 X2.7
7.7.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

The FE surge protection transfer cable is used to connect the UFLP and the main control board. It is an optional cable. The length of an FE surge protection transfer cable is 1 m (3.28 ft).
Exterior
The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-85. Figure 7-85 FE surge protection transfer cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-40 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable. Table 7-40 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Wire Color Orange White Green White Blue White
Twisted pair
X2.6 X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4 X2.5
310
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Wire Color Brown White
7.8 CPRI Electrical Cable

The CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and the RFU.
Exterior
The CPRI electrical cable is an SFP high speed transmission cable that has an SFP20 male connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-86. Figure 7-86 CPRI electrical cable
7.9 Signal Cables for the BTS3900AL

This section describes signal cables in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
7.9.1 Inter-BBU Signal Cable

The inter-BBU signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward information between the BBUs.
Cable Type
Inter-BBU signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions, as listed in Table 7-41. Table 7-41 Cable type Cable Inter-BBU signal cable Function Forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another Forwards baseband information from one BBU to another
Issue 2012-08-05 (04) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Installation Position Connects the UMPT and the UCIU Interconnects two WBBPf boards
311
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
The inter-BBU signal cable forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet, the inter-BBU signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-87. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the interBBU signal cable is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-88. Figure 7-87 Inter-BBU signal cable (1)
(1) DLC connector
(2) Breakout cable
Figure 7-88 Inter-BBU signal cable (2)
(1) DLC connector
(2) Armoured cable
(3) Breakout cable
The inter-BBU signal cable forwards baseband information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet, the inter-BBU signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-89. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the inter-BBU signal cable is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-90. Figure 7-89 Inter-BBU signal cable (3)
(1) MPO connector
(2) Heat shrink tubing
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
312
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-90 Inter-BBU signal cable (4)
(1) MPO connector
(2) Heat shrink tubing
7.9.2 BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. The maximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).
Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-91. One RJ45 connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added according to the field requirements. Figure 7-91 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-42 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable. Table 7-42 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable BBU Alarm Port EXTALM1 Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r X2.1 X2.2
Description
White and orange Orange White and green Green
Twisted pair
Boolean input 4+ Boolean input 4- (GND) Boolean input 5+ Boolean input 5- (GND)
313
Twisted pair
X2.3 X2.6
7 BTS3900AL Cables
BBU Alarm Port
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r X2.5 X2.4
Description
White and blue Blue White and brown Brown White and orange Orange White and green Green White and blue Blue White and brown Brown
Twisted pair
Boolean input 6+ Boolean input 6- (GND) Boolean input 7+ Boolean input 7- (GND) Boolean input 0+ Boolean input 0+ (GND) Boolean input 1+ Boolean input 1- (GND) Boolean input 2+ Boolean input 2- (GND) Boolean input 3+ Boolean input 3- (GND)
Twisted pair
X2.7 X2.8
EXTALM0
X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8
Twisted pair
X2.1 X2.2
Twisted pair
X2.3 X2.6
Twisted pair
X2.5 X2.4
Twisted pair
X2.7 X2.8
7.9.3 Inter-CCU Signal Cable

A signal cable connects two cascaded CCUs. The lower-level CCU can communicate with the BBU through the upper-level CCU.
Exterior
An inter-CCU signal cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-92. Figure 7-92 Inter-CCU signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
314
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 7-43 describes the pin assignment for the wires of an inter-CCU signal cable. Table 7-43 Pin assignment for the wires of an inter-CCU signal cable X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Description Twisted pair
7.9.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

A monitoring signal cable for the PMU connects the PMU and CCU. It transmits the RS485 signals collected by the PMU to the BBU through the CCU.
Exterior
A monitoring signal cable for the PMU is black. It has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-93. Figure 7-93 Monitoring signal cable for the PMU
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-44 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the PMU.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-44 Pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the PMU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Description Twisted pair
7.9.5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H

A monitoring signal cable for the TMC11H connects the CMUE and CCU. It transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUE to the BBU through the CCU.
Exterior
A monitoring signal cable for the TMC11H has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-94. Figure 7-94 Monitoring signal cable for the TMC11H
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-45 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the TMC11H. Table 7-45 Pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the TMC11H X1 End X1.1 X1.2
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
X2 End X2.1 X2.2
Color White Orange
Description Twisted pair
316
7 BTS3900AL Cables
X1 End X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8
X2 End X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8
Color White Green White Blue White Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.9.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the CMUF

A monitoring signal cable for the CMUF connects the CMUF and CCU. It transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUF to the BBU through the CCU.
Exterior
A monitoring signal cable for the CMUF is black. It has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-95. Figure 7-95 Monitoring signal cable for the CMUF
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-46 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the CMUF. Table 7-46 Pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the CMUF X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5
Color White Orange White Green White
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
317
7 BTS3900AL Cables
X1 End X1.6 X1.7 X1.8
X2 End X2.6 X2.7 X2.8
Color Blue White Brown
Description
Twisted pair
7.9.7 Inter-HAU Signal Cable

Cascaded HAUs are connected by signal cables. The lower-level HAU can communicate with the CCU through the upper-level HAU.
Exterior
An inter-HAU signal cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-96. Figure 7-96 Inter-HAU signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-47 describes the pin assignment for the wires of an inter-HAU signal cable. Table 7-47 Pin assignment for the wires of an inter-HAU signal cable X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Description Twisted pair
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
318
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.9.8 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HAU

A monitoring signal cable for the HAU connects the HAU and the CCU. It transmits the monitoring signals collected by the HAU to the CCU.
Exterior
A monitoring signal cable for the HAU has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-97. Figure 7-97 Monitoring signal cable for the HAU
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-48 describes the pin assignment of the monitoring signal cable for the HAU. Table 7-48 Pin assignment of the monitoring signal cable for the HAU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Description Twisted pair
7.9.9 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor

A monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor is used by the door status sensor to report the door status to the CCU.
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
319
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
There is a black bare wire at each end of a monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown in Figure 7-98. Figure 7-98 Monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor
7.9.10 Monitoring Signal Cable for the FAU

A monitoring signal cable for the FAU connects the FAU and the CCU. It transmits the monitoring signals collected by the FAU to the CCU.
Exterior
A signal cable for the FAU has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-99. Figure 7-99 Monitoring signal cable for the FAU
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-49 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the FAU. Table 7-49 Pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable for the FAU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7
Color White Orange White Green White Blue White
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
320
7 BTS3900AL Cables
X1 End X1.8
X2 End X2.8
Color Brown
Description
7.9.11 ELU Signal Cable

An ELU signal cable connects the ELU and the CCU. The cabinet type is reported to the CCU through this type of cable.
Exterior
An ELU signal cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-100. Figure 7-100 ELU signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-50 describes the pin assignment for the wires of an ELU signal cable. Table 7-50 Pin assignment for the wires of an ELU signal cable X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Description Twisted pair
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
321
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.9.12 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the BBU transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CCU to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-101 shows a monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the BBU. Figure 7-101 Monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the BBU
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-51 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the BBU. Table 7-51 Pin assignment for the wires of a monitoring signal cable between the CCU and the BBU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7 X2.8 Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Description Twisted pair cable
7.9.13 Monitoring Signal Cables for the AC Surge Protection Module

A monitoring signal cable for the AC surge protection module connects the AC surge protection module in the PDU05A to the CCU.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
Figure 7-102 shows a monitoring signal cable for the AC surge protection module. Figure 7-102 Monitoring signal cable for the AC surge protection module
(1) 2-pin terminal block
7.9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA

A monitoring signal cable for the EMUA transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
Exterior
Figure 7-103 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA. Figure 7-103 Monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-52 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Table 7-52 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA Pin on the RJ45 Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.5 X1.4 DB9 male connector X2.3 X2.7 X2.6 X2.2 Color Description Associated Port on the APMI TX+ TXTwisted pair RXRX+
White Orange White Blue
Twisted pair
7.9.15 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable

A temperature monitoring signal cable enables the CMUF to monitor the temperature in a cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 7-104 shows a temperature monitoring signal cable. Figure 7-104 Temperature monitoring signal cable
(1) Temperature sensor
(2) 4-pin connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-53 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a temperature monitoring signal cable. Table 7-53 Pin assignment for the wires of a temperature monitoring signal cable Wire W1 W2 W3 X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X2 End X2.3 X2.2 X2.1
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
324
7 BTS3900AL Cables
7.9.16 GPS Clock Signal Cable

The GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable is optional.
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-105. Figure 7-105 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector
(2) N-type female connector
7.9.17 GPS Jumper

This section describes a GPS jumper that is used when a GPS surge protector is installed in a cabinet. The maximum length of a GPS jumper is 100 m (328.08 ft).
Exterior
There are N50 straight male connectors at both ends of a GPS jumper, which connects the GPS surge protector and GPS antenna. Figure 7-106 shows a GPS jumper. Figure 7-106 GPS jumper
(1) N50 straight male connector
7.9.18 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance

An adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cable during local maintenance.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Exterior
The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-107. Figure 7-107 Adapter used for local maintenance
(1) USB connector
(2) Ethernet connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-54 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance. Table 7-54 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance Pin of the USB Connector X1.9 X1.8 X1.6 X1.5 X1.Shell Wire Color Blue White Orange White Shield Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Pin of the Ethernet Connector X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.Shell
7.10 BTS3900AL RF Cables

RF cables for the BTS3900AL consist of RF jumpers and inter-RFU RF signal cables.
7.10.1 RF Jumper
The RF jumper connects the RFU and the feeder of the antenna system for signal exchange between the base station and the antenna system.
Exterior
Figure 7-108 shows an RF jumper.
7 BTS3900AL Cables
Figure 7-108 RF jumper
(1) DIN straight male connector
(2) DIN elbow male connector
NOTE
Macro base stations use super-flexible 1/2-inch jumpers.
7.10.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable

The inter-RFU RF signal cable is used for transmitting the received diversity signals between two RFUs. The cable connects the RX IN port on one RFU and the RX OUT port on another RFU.
Structure
Figure 7-109 shows the inter-RFU RF signal cable. Figure 7-109 Inter-RFU RF signal cable
(1) QMA elbow male connector
Issue 2012-08-05 (04)
327

BTS3900AL

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

BTS3900AL

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

BTS3900AL (Ver.

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

About This Document

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

About This Document

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

About This Document

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

4 Power Distribution Scheme and Power Devices of the BTS3900AL Cabinet...............168

5 BTS3900AL Monitoring Scheme and Boards.......................................................................196

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-20), no information is deleted from this issue.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-25), no information is deleted from this issue.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Contents 7.1 List of BTS3900AL Cables

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

2.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet

2.2 Interior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Figure 2-2 Interior of the BTS3900AL AC cabinet

Issue 2012-08-05 (04)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description

Option al or Mandat ory Mandato ry

Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet 1

Surge protecti on subrack for transmi ssion signals DCDU11C

Mandato ry Mandato ry Optional